1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes false
138 \output_changes false
152 by the \SpecialChar LyX
157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
159 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
160 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
161 Documentation mailing list:
162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
164 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
175 \begin_inset Newline newline
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Note Note
186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
187 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
194 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
202 \begin_layout Standard
203 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
204 LatexCommand tableofcontents
211 \begin_layout Chapter
215 \begin_layout Section
216 What is \SpecialChar LyX
220 \begin_layout Standard
222 is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
282 's philosophy: most importantly,
283 the format of all of the manuals.
284 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
285 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
291 manual describes that, too.
294 \begin_layout Section
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
301 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
303 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
304 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
308 \begin_layout Standard
309 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
310 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
311 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
313 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
314 only a vertical scrollbar.
315 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
316 The first case is large images.
317 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
318 image and use the option
329 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
332 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
333 this doesn't work for equations yet.
336 \begin_layout Standard
337 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
338 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
346 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
353 \begin_layout Section
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
360 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
362 Just select the manual you want to read from the
369 \begin_layout Section
370 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
374 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
381 \begin_layout Standard
382 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
383 can be configured via the menu
385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
389 \begin_inset Index idx
392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
399 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 packages are available.
403 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
405 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
407 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
412 \begin_inset space \space{}
415 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
416 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
418 To force \SpecialChar LyX
419 to re-inspect your system, you should use
421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
425 \begin_inset Index idx
428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
429 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
435 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
436 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
439 \begin_layout Section
442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
444 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
451 \begin_layout Standard
452 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
453 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
454 installed, but you will not be
455 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
456 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
457 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
458 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
459 document can always be output as plain text
463 \begin_layout Standard
464 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
465 or DocBook classes or packages.
466 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
467 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
473 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
476 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
484 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
485 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 \begin_inset Note Note
495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
496 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
497 Code box prevent that the term
498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
506 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
507 More about \SpecialChar TeX
508 Code is described in section
513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
515 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
519 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 is explained in section
525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
527 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
537 \begin_inset Index idx
540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
547 See section 5.1 of the
551 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
555 \begin_layout Chapter
556 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
560 \begin_layout Section
561 Basic File Operations
562 \begin_inset Index idx
565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
574 \begin_layout Standard
579 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
580 in addition to some more advanced operations:
583 \begin_layout Itemize
605 \begin_layout Itemize
621 arg "buffer-new-template"
627 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
659 \begin_layout Itemize
673 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
707 arg "buffer-write-as"
713 \begin_layout Itemize
727 \begin_layout Itemize
741 \begin_layout Standard
742 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
743 a few minor differences.
746 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
757 command lists the available templates.
758 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
759 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
760 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
768 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
775 \begin_layout Standard
776 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
808 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
809 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
810 is just that — a big, blank space.
818 \begin_layout Standard
839 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
844 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
847 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
865 will reload the document from disk.
866 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
867 and want to restore it to the last save.
876 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
877 them as your changes.
880 \begin_layout Section
881 Basic Editing Features
882 \begin_inset Index idx
885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
894 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
901 \begin_layout Standard
902 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
903 can perform cut and paste operations
904 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
905 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
906 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
907 editing features and how to access
909 We will start with cut and paste.
912 \begin_layout Standard
913 As you might expect, the
917 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
918 various other editing features.
919 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
923 \begin_layout Itemize
929 \begin_inset Index idx
932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
961 \begin_layout Itemize
967 \begin_inset Index idx
970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
999 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset Index idx
1008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1033 \begin_layout Itemize
1037 \begin_inset space ~
1043 \begin_layout Itemize
1047 \begin_inset space ~
1053 \begin_layout Itemize
1057 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset space ~
1067 \begin_inset Index idx
1070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1079 \begin_inset Index idx
1082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1097 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1107 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1113 \begin_layout Standard
1114 The first three are self-explanatory.
1115 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1116 and other programs by
1137 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1138 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1143 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1144 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1145 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1146 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1147 into individual cells.
1151 \begin_inset space ~
1156 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1157 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1161 \begin_layout Standard
1165 \begin_inset space ~
1170 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1172 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1187 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1188 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1189 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1195 \begin_inset space \space{}
1198 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1199 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1202 \begin_inset space ~
1205 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1215 \begin_inset space ~
1224 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1225 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1227 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1231 \begin_inset space ~
1236 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1237 start a new paragraph.
1238 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1239 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1247 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1261 \begin_inset space ~
1264 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1267 paste from the primary selection.
1268 This is normally the currently selected text.
1271 \begin_layout Standard
1274 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1276 \begin_inset space ~
1280 \begin_inset space ~
1288 \begin_inset space ~
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1298 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1304 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1307 \begin_inset space ~
1316 \begin_inset space ~
1321 button to skip the current word.
1325 \begin_inset space ~
1330 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1334 \begin_inset space ~
1339 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1341 If the toggle is set, searching for
1342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1353 will not match the word
1354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 Match whole words only
1370 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1371 to only find complete words, e.
1372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1401 offers also an advanced
1404 \begin_inset space ~
1408 \begin_inset space ~
1413 feature that is described in sec.
1414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1420 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1427 \begin_layout Standard
1428 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1429 \begin_inset space \space{}
1433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1441 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1443 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1448 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1455 \begin_layout Standard
1459 arg "inset-select-all"
1462 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1463 When the cursor is inside an inset
1466 arg "inset-select-all"
1469 selects the content of the inset.
1473 arg "inset-select-all"
1476 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1481 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1484 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1488 \begin_layout Section
1490 \begin_inset Index idx
1493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1500 \begin_inset Index idx
1503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1512 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1519 \begin_layout Standard
1520 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1522 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1525 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1528 or the toolbar button
1534 to undo some mistake.
1535 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1537 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1540 or the toolbar button
1547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1554 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1558 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1561 \begin_layout Standard
1562 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1571 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1572 This is a consequence of the 100
1573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1576 step undo limit mentioned above.
1579 \begin_layout Standard
1588 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1590 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1594 \begin_layout Section
1596 \begin_inset Index idx
1599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1608 \begin_layout Standard
1609 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1612 \begin_layout Enumerate
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1622 once anywhere in the edit window.
1623 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1632 \begin_layout Itemize
1639 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1642 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1645 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1646 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1649 \begin_layout Itemize
1650 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1653 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1660 \begin_layout Enumerate
1661 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1665 \begin_layout Standard
1666 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1667 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1671 \begin_layout Section
1673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1675 name "sec:Navigating"
1680 \begin_inset Index idx
1683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1692 \begin_layout Standard
1694 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1697 \begin_layout Itemize
1702 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1703 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1706 \begin_layout Itemize
1707 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1709 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1711 \begin_inset space ~
1716 or by the toolbar button
1719 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1725 \begin_layout Itemize
1726 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1728 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1731 and use the same menu to return to them.
1732 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1735 \begin_layout Standard
1739 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1744 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1745 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1747 \begin_inset space ~
1752 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1753 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1754 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1755 your last editing position.
1758 \begin_layout Standard
1763 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1767 \begin_layout Subsection
1769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1771 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1778 \begin_layout Standard
1779 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1780 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1781 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1789 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1793 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1800 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1805 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1809 \begin_layout Standard
1810 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1811 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1812 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1813 dialog and to modify the citation.
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1817 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1819 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1820 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1828 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1831 \begin_layout Standard
1832 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1833 you further to control the display.
1838 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1839 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1845 option keeps it in the current view state.
1846 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1847 \begin_inset space ~
1850 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1851 \begin_inset space ~
1854 3, the subsections of sections
1855 \begin_inset space ~
1858 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1863 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1864 \begin_inset space ~
1868 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1878 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1881 \begin_layout Standard
1888 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1889 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1903 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1904 So, for example, you can move section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 \begin_inset space ~
1912 2.4 or after section
1913 \begin_inset space ~
1918 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1931 (or the corresponding key bindings
1939 ) you can change the level of sections.
1940 So you can for example make section
1941 \begin_inset space ~
1945 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_inset space ~
1955 \begin_layout Section
1956 Input/Word Completion
1957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1959 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1964 \begin_inset Index idx
1967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1974 \begin_inset Index idx
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2008 \begin_layout Standard
2010 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2012 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2013 is used to propose completions.
2016 \begin_layout Standard
2017 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2020 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2025 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2032 \begin_inset space ~
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2041 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2045 \begin_inset space ~
2050 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2051 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2055 \begin_inset space ~
2061 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2062 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2063 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2064 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2067 \begin_layout Standard
2069 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2070 completions available.
2075 key to accept a proposed completion.
2076 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2077 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2078 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2085 \begin_layout Standard
2086 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2087 ing options for text.
2088 The special math option
2092 enables characters to be composed.
2093 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2094 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2097 , you can then input the characters
2098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2109 to a formula to get it.
2110 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2111 of the math toolbar.
2112 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2116 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2117 's installation folder.
2118 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2127 \begin_layout Section
2129 \begin_inset Index idx
2132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2139 \begin_inset Index idx
2142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2171 \begin_inset Index idx
2174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2205 \begin_layout Standard
2206 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2220 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2223 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2227 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2234 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2241 \begin_layout Standard
2245 \begin_inset space ~
2253 \begin_inset space ~
2274 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2278 \begin_layout Labeling
2279 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2283 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2284 LatexCommand nomenclature
2286 description "Tabulator key"
2292 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2294 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2295 \begin_inset space ~
2299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2301 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2308 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2312 , especially section
2313 \begin_inset space ~
2317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2319 reference "subsec:Lists"
2325 If you are still confused, look in the
2330 \begin_inset Newline newline
2338 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2339 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2343 \begin_layout Labeling
2344 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2348 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2349 LatexCommand nomenclature
2351 description "Escape key"
2358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2365 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2366 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2369 \begin_layout Labeling
2370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2376 \begin_inset space ~
2380 \begin_inset space ~
2387 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2388 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2392 \begin_layout Standard
2393 There are three modifier keys:
2396 \begin_layout Labeling
2397 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2415 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2416 LatexCommand nomenclature
2418 description "Control key"
2422 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2423 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2427 \begin_layout Itemize
2436 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2439 \begin_layout Itemize
2448 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2451 \begin_layout Itemize
2460 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2464 \begin_layout Labeling
2465 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2483 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2484 LatexCommand nomenclature
2486 description "Shift key"
2490 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2491 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2494 \begin_layout Labeling
2495 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2513 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2514 LatexCommand nomenclature
2516 description "Alt or Meta key"
2520 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2521 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2522 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2528 \begin_inset Newline newline
2531 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2533 menu accelerator keys
2536 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2537 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2541 \begin_layout Standard
2542 For example, the sequence
2543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2559 \begin_inset space ~
2567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2586 \begin_inset space ~
2592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2602 \begin_layout Standard
2607 manual lists all other things bound to the
2615 \begin_layout Standard
2616 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2618 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2619 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2620 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2621 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2622 The \SpecialChar LyX
2623 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2624 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2625 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2627 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2643 followed by a capital
2650 \begin_layout Chapter
2653 \begin_inset Index idx
2656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2666 \begin_layout Section
2668 \begin_inset Index idx
2671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2680 \begin_layout Subsection
2684 \begin_layout Standard
2685 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2686 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2687 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2688 numbering schemes, and so on.
2689 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2690 and format the title of your document differently.
2693 \begin_layout Standard
2698 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2699 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2700 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2701 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2702 picks one for you by default.
2703 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2706 \begin_layout Subsection
2708 \begin_inset Index idx
2711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2720 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2727 \begin_layout Standard
2728 You can select a class using the
2730 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2731 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2735 \begin_inset Index idx
2738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2745 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2759 \begin_layout Description
2760 Article for basic articles
2763 \begin_layout Description
2764 Report for basic reports
2767 \begin_layout Description
2768 Book for writing a book
2771 \begin_layout Description
2772 Letter for US-style letters
2775 \begin_layout Standard
2776 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2777 only uses if you have installed
2778 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2779 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2780 distributions will include
2782 Here are some of the classes.
2783 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2785 Special Document Classes
2794 \begin_layout Description
2795 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2798 \begin_layout Description
2799 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2803 \begin_layout Description
2804 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2808 \begin_layout Description
2809 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2810 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2811 There are three article layouts available.
2812 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2813 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2814 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2815 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2820 sequential numbering
2821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2824 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2825 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2826 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2827 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2830 \begin_layout Description
2831 Beamer Layout for presentations
2834 \begin_layout Description
2835 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2836 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2837 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2838 with \SpecialChar LyX
2842 \begin_layout Description
2843 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2846 \begin_layout Description
2848 \begin_inset space ~
2851 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2858 \begin_layout Description
2859 Foils Used to make transparencies
2862 \begin_layout Description
2863 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2864 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2865 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2866 with \SpecialChar LyX
2870 \begin_layout Description
2871 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2872 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2875 \begin_layout Description
2876 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2879 \begin_layout Description
2880 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2883 \begin_layout Description
2884 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2885 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2886 (Is used by this document.)
2889 \begin_layout Description
2890 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2893 \begin_layout Description
2894 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2897 \begin_layout Description
2902 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2903 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2905 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2909 \begin_layout Description
2910 Slides Used to make transparencies
2913 \begin_layout Description
2915 \begin_inset space ~
2918 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2919 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2922 \begin_layout Description
2923 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2926 \begin_layout Standard
2927 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2929 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2935 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2936 of the document classes.
2939 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2943 \begin_layout Standard
2944 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2947 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2949 \begin_inset Index idx
2952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2969 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2970 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2972 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2975 \begin_layout Standard
2978 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2983 , are highly specialized.
2985 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
2986 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
2987 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2988 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2989 by some document class.
2990 There are just too many of them.
2991 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2994 \begin_layout Standard
2995 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3003 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3004 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3005 document class for a new file.
3007 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3012 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3021 manual for information on how to install them.
3022 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3028 \begin_layout Standard
3029 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3030 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3031 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3032 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3033 class files to be used for dissertation
3034 s submitted to those universities.
3035 The \SpecialChar LyX
3036 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3038 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3042 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3048 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3055 name "subsec:Modules"
3060 \begin_inset Index idx
3063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3074 chosen document class.
3075 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3076 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3087 \begin_inset Index idx
3090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3097 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3101 \begin_layout Standard
3102 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3103 packages or file format converters that are not always
3104 installed by default.
3106 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3107 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3108 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3109 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3111 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3112 file without the missing prerequisites.
3113 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3114 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3117 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3121 \begin_inset Index idx
3124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3125 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3135 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3144 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3147 \begin_layout Standard
3148 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3156 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3158 will advise you about these things.
3166 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3170 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3175 \begin_inset Index idx
3178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3179 Document ! Local Layout
3187 \begin_layout Standard
3188 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3189 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3190 : They are intended to be used in
3191 a variety of different documents.
3192 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3193 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3194 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3195 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3196 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3198 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3216 manual for information on how to use it.
3219 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3223 \begin_layout Standard
3224 Each class has a default set of options.
3225 Here's a quick table describing them:
3228 \begin_layout Standard
3229 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3235 \begin_layout Standard
3237 \begin_inset Tabular
3238 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3239 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3240 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3241 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3242 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3243 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3244 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3698 \begin_layout Standard
3699 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3705 \begin_layout Standard
3706 You're probably also wondering what
3707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3711 \begin_inset space ~
3715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3719 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3720 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3725 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3730 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3740 headings, there are also
3748 headings, and so on.
3749 We will describe these headings fully in section
3750 \begin_inset space ~
3754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3756 reference "subsec:Headings"
3763 \begin_layout Subsection
3765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3767 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3772 \begin_inset Index idx
3775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3782 \begin_inset Index idx
3785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3794 \begin_layout Standard
3795 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3797 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3804 \begin_inset space ~
3812 \begin_inset space ~
3817 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3819 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3820 doesn't support special options you want to
3821 use for your document.
3822 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3823 -class and its options, you have to read
3827 \begin_layout Standard
3831 \begin_inset space ~
3838 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3844 \begin_inset space ~
3849 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3850 You can choose between the following five options:
3853 \begin_layout Labeling
3854 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3859 Use default page style of current class.
3862 \begin_layout Labeling
3863 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3868 No page numbers or headings.
3871 \begin_layout Labeling
3872 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3880 \begin_layout Labeling
3881 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3886 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3887 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3888 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3889 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3892 \begin_layout Labeling
3893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3898 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3899 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3905 \begin_inset Index idx
3908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3910 -packages ! fancyhdr
3916 How they are defined is explained in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3930 \begin_layout Standard
3931 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3932 \begin_inset space ~
3936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3938 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3945 \begin_layout Subsection
3946 Paper Size and Orientation
3947 \begin_inset Index idx
3950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3951 Document ! Paper size
3957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3959 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3966 \begin_layout Standard
3967 You can find the following options in the menu
3970 \begin_inset space ~
3977 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3981 \begin_inset Index idx
3984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3993 \begin_layout Labeling
3994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4003 What size paper to print on.
4008 \begin_layout Itemize
4014 \begin_layout Itemize
4020 \begin_layout Itemize
4026 \begin_layout Itemize
4032 \begin_layout Itemize
4035 US letter, US legal, US executive
4038 \begin_layout Itemize
4044 \begin_layout Itemize
4051 \begin_layout Labeling
4052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4057 To choose whether to output as
4068 \begin_layout Labeling
4069 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4073 \begin_inset space ~
4078 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4079 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4082 \begin_layout Subsection
4084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4086 name "subsec:Margins"
4091 \begin_inset Index idx
4094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4101 \begin_inset Index idx
4104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4113 \begin_layout Standard
4114 Paper margins are set in the menu
4116 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4120 \begin_inset Index idx
4123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4132 \begin_layout Standard
4133 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4134 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4135 the paper format and the font size into account.
4138 \begin_layout Subsection
4142 \begin_layout Standard
4143 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4149 That includes the paragraph environments.
4150 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4151 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4152 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4154 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4163 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4165 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4166 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4167 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4170 \begin_layout Section
4171 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4172 \begin_inset Index idx
4175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4176 Paragraph ! Indentation
4184 \begin_layout Subsection
4186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4188 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4195 \begin_layout Standard
4196 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4197 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4200 \begin_layout Standard
4201 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4202 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4203 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4204 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4208 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4214 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4215 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4216 language than English.
4218 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4221 \begin_layout Standard
4222 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4223 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4224 into \SpecialChar LyX
4226 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4229 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4231 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4232 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4233 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4240 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4241 goes to produce a printable file.
4246 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4248 gives you the ability globally to change
4252 these pre-coded spacings.
4253 We will explain more later.
4256 \begin_layout Subsection
4257 Paragraph Separation
4258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4260 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4265 \begin_inset Index idx
4268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 Paragraph ! Separation
4277 \begin_layout Standard
4285 \begin_inset space ~
4293 \begin_inset space ~
4300 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4304 \begin_inset Index idx
4307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4313 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4316 \begin_layout Subsection
4320 \begin_layout Standard
4321 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4324 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4326 \begin_inset space ~
4331 dialog and toggle the
4334 \begin_inset space ~
4339 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4342 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4346 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4347 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4351 \begin_layout Standard
4352 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4353 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4356 \begin_layout Subsection
4358 \begin_inset Index idx
4361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4362 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4370 \begin_layout Standard
4373 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4377 \begin_inset Index idx
4380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4389 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4393 \begin_inset space ~
4402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4403 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4409 \begin_inset Index idx
4412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 -packages ! setspace
4419 installed to use this feature.
4424 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4426 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4428 \begin_inset space ~
4433 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4434 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4437 \begin_layout Section
4438 Paragraph Environments
4439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4441 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4446 \begin_inset Index idx
4449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4450 Paragraph ! Environments
4456 \begin_inset Index idx
4459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4460 Paragraph environments|(
4468 \begin_layout Subsection
4472 \begin_layout Standard
4473 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4476 \begin_layout Standard
4495 \begin_inset Newline newline
4498 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4500 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4501 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4502 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4511 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4514 \begin_layout Standard
4515 A paragraph environment is simply a
4516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4523 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4524 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4525 scheme, labels, and so on.
4526 Additionally, you can
4527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4534 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4535 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4536 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4537 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4539 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4541 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4544 \begin_layout Standard
4545 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4546 \begin_inset Graphics
4547 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4553 at the left end of the toolbar.
4555 will change the environment of the
4559 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4560 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4561 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4565 \begin_layout Standard
4574 create a new paragraph using the
4578 paragraph environment.
4580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4587 because if you are in one of these environments:
4590 \begin_layout Itemize
4596 \begin_layout Itemize
4602 \begin_layout Itemize
4608 \begin_layout Itemize
4614 \begin_layout Itemize
4620 \begin_layout Itemize
4626 \begin_layout Itemize
4632 \begin_layout Standard
4634 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4638 , rather than resetting it to
4643 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4644 \begin_inset space ~
4648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4650 reference "sec:Nesting"
4657 \begin_layout Subsection
4661 \begin_layout Standard
4662 The default paragraph environment is
4667 It creates a plain paragraph.
4669 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4670 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4671 this manual) are in the
4678 \begin_layout Standard
4679 You can nest a paragraph using the
4683 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4691 \begin_layout Subsection
4693 \begin_inset Index idx
4696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4705 \begin_layout Standard
4706 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4707 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4716 for thanks or contact information.
4717 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4718 places all of this on a separate page
4719 along with today's date.
4720 For other types of documents, the title
4721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4728 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4734 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4748 Here's how you use them:
4751 \begin_layout Itemize
4752 Put the title of your document in the
4759 \begin_layout Itemize
4760 Put the author name in the
4767 \begin_layout Itemize
4768 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4769 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4775 Note that using this environment is optional.
4776 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4777 will automatically insert today's date.
4778 If you don't want a date, use the option
4780 Suppress default date on front page
4784 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4785 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4787 \begin_inset space ~
4795 \begin_layout Standard
4796 You can use footnotes to insert
4797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4804 or contact information.
4807 \begin_layout Subsection
4809 \begin_inset Index idx
4812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4821 name "subsec:Headings"
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4831 takes care of the numbering for you.
4834 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4836 \begin_inset Index idx
4839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4840 Section headings ! Numbered
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4849 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4853 \begin_layout Enumerate
4859 \begin_layout Enumerate
4865 \begin_layout Enumerate
4871 \begin_layout Enumerate
4877 \begin_layout Enumerate
4883 \begin_layout Enumerate
4889 \begin_layout Enumerate
4895 \begin_layout Standard
4897 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4898 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4899 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4902 \begin_layout Standard
4903 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4904 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4905 You group the book into chapters.
4907 does a similar grouping:
4910 \begin_layout Itemize
4915 is divided into either
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4938 \begin_layout Itemize
4950 \begin_layout Itemize
4962 \begin_layout Itemize
4974 \begin_layout Itemize
4986 \begin_layout Standard
4987 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4995 Not all document types use the
4999 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5004 is the top-level heading.
5012 \begin_layout Standard
5017 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5018 labels it with its number,
5019 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5021 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5035 \begin_inset Index idx
5038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5039 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5048 The unnumbered section headings have a
5049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5056 at the end of their name.
5057 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5058 the table of contents, see section
5059 \begin_inset space ~
5063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5072 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5073 Changing the Numbering
5074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5076 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5083 \begin_layout Standard
5084 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5085 in the Table of Contents.
5086 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5088 Just as certain classes start with
5102 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5112 This is something you can change.
5115 \begin_layout Standard
5118 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5122 \begin_inset Index idx
5125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5134 \begin_inset space ~
5138 \begin_inset space ~
5143 you will see two counters.
5148 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5149 numbers a section heading.
5150 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5155 Short Titles of Headings
5156 \begin_inset Index idx
5159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5160 Section headings ! Short titles
5166 \begin_inset Argument 1
5169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5178 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5185 \begin_layout Standard
5186 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5187 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5188 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5189 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5192 \begin_layout Standard
5194 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5195 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5196 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5197 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5202 \begin_inset space ~
5208 This will insert a box labeled
5209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5213 \begin_inset space ~
5217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5220 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5221 This also works for captions inside floats.
5222 There can only be one short title per title.
5225 \begin_layout Standard
5226 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5229 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5233 \begin_layout Standard
5234 The following information applies to all section headings:
5237 \begin_layout Itemize
5238 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5241 \begin_layout Itemize
5242 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5245 \begin_layout Itemize
5246 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5249 \begin_layout Itemize
5250 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5253 \begin_layout Subsection
5257 \begin_layout Standard
5259 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5273 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5274 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5275 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5276 the text they contain.
5277 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5285 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5288 \begin_layout Standard
5289 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5298 when you start a new paragraph.
5299 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5303 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5304 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5305 have to change back to the
5309 environment yourself.
5312 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5321 \begin_inset Index idx
5324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5333 \begin_layout Standard
5334 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5335 time for the differences.
5344 are identical except for one difference:
5348 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5357 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5361 Here's an example of the
5374 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5376 See – no indentation!
5380 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5381 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5382 the other paragraph.
5385 \begin_layout Standard
5386 Here's another example, this time in the
5393 \begin_layout Quotation
5399 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5400 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5401 the first line, then
5405 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5409 you were quoting other text.
5412 \begin_layout Quotation
5413 Here's a new paragraph.
5414 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5415 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5418 \begin_layout Standard
5419 As the examples show,
5423 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5424 They should put quotes in the
5429 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5433 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5436 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5438 \begin_inset Index idx
5441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5448 \begin_inset Index idx
5451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5467 \begin_layout Standard
5472 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5478 \begin_inset Newline newline
5481 Which I did not rehearse!
5485 It could be much worse.
5486 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5488 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5489 indented a bit more than the first.
5490 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5496 \begin_inset Newline newline
5499 And make things look fine
5500 \begin_inset Newline newline
5506 arg "newline-insert newline"
5512 \begin_layout Standard
5517 does not indent both margins.
5518 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5519 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5522 arg "newline-insert newline"
5528 \begin_layout Subsection
5530 \begin_inset Index idx
5533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5549 \begin_layout Standard
5551 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5561 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5562 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5571 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5572 lets you provide your own label.
5573 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5574 describing some general features of all four of them.
5577 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5581 \begin_layout Standard
5582 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5584 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5585 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5594 reset the environment to
5598 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5599 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5600 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5608 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5615 \begin_layout Standard
5616 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5617 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5618 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5620 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5621 you read all of section
5622 \begin_inset space ~
5626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5628 reference "sec:Nesting"
5635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5637 \begin_inset Index idx
5640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5656 \begin_layout Standard
5657 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5661 paragraph environment.
5662 It has the following properties:
5665 \begin_layout Itemize
5666 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5670 \begin_layout Itemize
5672 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5675 \begin_layout Itemize
5676 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5680 \begin_layout Itemize
5681 The items can have any length.
5683 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5684 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5691 \begin_layout Itemize
5696 environment inside another
5700 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5704 \begin_layout Itemize
5705 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5708 \begin_layout Itemize
5710 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5713 \begin_layout Itemize
5715 \begin_inset space ~
5719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5721 reference "sec:Nesting"
5725 for a full explanation of nesting.
5729 \begin_layout Standard
5730 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5739 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5742 \begin_layout Standard
5743 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5744 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5747 \begin_layout Itemize
5748 The label for the first level
5752 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5756 \begin_layout Itemize
5757 The label for the second level is a dash.
5761 \begin_layout Itemize
5762 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5766 \begin_layout Itemize
5767 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5771 \begin_layout Itemize
5772 Back out to the third level.
5776 \begin_layout Itemize
5777 Back to the second level.
5781 \begin_layout Itemize
5782 Back to the outermost level.
5785 \begin_layout Standard
5786 These are the default labels for an
5791 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5793 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5796 dialog in the submenu
5801 \begin_inset Index idx
5804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5810 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5814 \begin_layout Standard
5815 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5816 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5818 \begin_inset space ~
5822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5824 reference "sec:Nesting"
5831 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5833 \begin_inset Index idx
5836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5845 name "sec:Enumerate"
5852 \begin_layout Standard
5857 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5858 It has these properties:
5861 \begin_layout Enumerate
5862 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5866 \begin_layout Enumerate
5867 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5871 \begin_layout Enumerate
5873 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5876 \begin_layout Enumerate
5881 environment resets the counter to one.
5884 \begin_layout Enumerate
5897 \begin_layout Enumerate
5898 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5899 Items can have any length.
5902 \begin_layout Enumerate
5903 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5906 \begin_layout Enumerate
5907 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5910 \begin_layout Enumerate
5911 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5915 \begin_layout Standard
5924 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5926 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5927 labels the four different levels in an
5934 \begin_layout Enumerate
5935 The first level of an
5939 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5943 \begin_layout Enumerate
5944 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5948 \begin_layout Enumerate
5949 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5953 \begin_layout Enumerate
5954 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5957 \begin_layout Enumerate
5958 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5963 \begin_layout Enumerate
5964 Back to the third level
5968 \begin_layout Enumerate
5969 Back to the second level.
5973 \begin_layout Enumerate
5974 Back to the outermost level.
5977 \begin_layout Standard
5978 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5982 environment, see section
5983 \begin_inset space ~
5987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5989 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
5994 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
5998 \begin_layout Standard
5999 There is more to nesting
6003 environments than we've stated here.
6004 You should read section
6005 \begin_inset space ~
6009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6011 reference "sec:Nesting"
6015 to learn more about nesting.
6018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6020 \begin_inset Index idx
6023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6032 \begin_layout Standard
6033 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6037 list has no fixed label.
6038 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6047 of the first line as the label.
6051 \begin_layout Description
6052 Example: This is an example of the
6059 \begin_layout Standard
6061 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6065 \begin_layout Standard
6067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6074 it is meant that the first usage of the
6078 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6080 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6088 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6093 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6094 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6096 \begin_inset space ~
6102 \begin_inset space ~
6106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6108 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6112 for more information.) Here is an example:
6115 \begin_layout Description
6117 \begin_inset space ~
6120 Example: This one shows how to use a
6123 \begin_inset space ~
6135 \begin_layout Description
6136 Usage: You should use the
6140 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6141 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6143 It's not a good idea to use a
6147 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6148 You're better off using
6160 paragraphs into them.
6163 \begin_layout Description
6164 Nesting: You can nest
6168 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6172 \begin_layout Standard
6173 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6174 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6175 them from the first line.
6178 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6180 \begin_inset Index idx
6183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6192 \begin_layout Standard
6197 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6198 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6202 \begin_layout Standard
6211 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6213 Here are its properties:
6216 \begin_layout Labeling
6217 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6219 \begin_inset space ~
6222 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6231 of each line as the item label.
6236 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6237 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6238 space as described above.
6241 \begin_layout Labeling
6242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6243 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6244 uses different margins for the item label and the
6245 body of the item text.
6246 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6247 label width plus a little extra space.
6251 \begin_layout Labeling
6252 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6254 \begin_inset space ~
6257 width \SpecialChar LyX
6258 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6259 If the label width is larger, the label
6260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6267 into the first line.
6268 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6269 margin of the rest of the item text.
6272 \begin_layout Labeling
6273 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6275 \begin_inset space ~
6278 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6283 environment has the same left margin.
6284 \begin_inset Newline newline
6287 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6290 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6292 \begin_inset space ~
6297 dialog (toolbar button
6300 arg "layout-paragraph"
6307 \begin_inset space ~
6312 determines the default label width.
6313 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6322 multiple times instead.
6323 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6333 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6336 \begin_inset space ~
6341 every time you alter a label in a
6346 \begin_inset Newline newline
6349 The predefined default width is the length of
6350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6358 \begin_inset space ~
6364 \begin_layout Standard
6369 list the same way as the
6373 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6379 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6383 \begin_layout Standard
6388 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6389 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6391 \begin_inset space ~
6395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6397 reference "sec:Nesting"
6401 to learn about nesting.
6404 \begin_layout Standard
6405 There is yet another feature of the
6409 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6410 left-justifies the item labels by
6412 You can use additional
6416 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6417 justifies the item label.
6422 are documented in section
6423 \begin_inset space ~
6427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6429 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6434 Here are some examples:
6437 \begin_layout Labeling
6438 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6439 Left The default for
6446 \begin_layout Labeling
6447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6448 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6455 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6458 \begin_layout Labeling
6459 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6460 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6464 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6471 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6474 \begin_layout Subsection
6476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6478 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6483 \begin_inset Index idx
6486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6495 \begin_layout Standard
6496 The features described in this section require that the module
6498 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6500 is loaded in the document settings.
6501 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6507 \begin_inset Index idx
6510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6512 -packages ! enumitem
6520 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6521 Custom Enumerate Lists
6522 \begin_inset Index idx
6525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6526 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6534 \begin_layout Standard
6536 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6542 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6543 There you add the command
6546 \begin_layout Standard
6554 \begin_layout Standard
6566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6567 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6568 Code, look at section
6569 \begin_inset space ~
6573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6575 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6588 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6595 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6596 For capital Roman numerals replace
6608 in the command above.
6609 For Arabic numerals use
6617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6624 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6639 \begin_layout Standard
6641 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6649 You can only number 26
6650 \begin_inset space ~
6653 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6661 \begin_layout Standard
6662 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6663 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6666 \begin_layout Standard
6667 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6670 \begin_layout Enumerate
6671 \begin_inset Argument 1
6674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6700 \begin_layout Enumerate
6701 \begin_inset Argument 1
6704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6727 \begin_layout Enumerate
6732 \begin_layout Enumerate
6733 \begin_inset Argument 1
6736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6760 \begin_layout Enumerate
6761 \begin_inset Argument 1
6764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6790 \begin_layout Standard
6791 For this list these commands were used:
6794 \begin_layout Standard
6805 \begin_inset Newline newline
6813 \begin_inset Newline newline
6821 \begin_inset Newline newline
6831 \begin_layout Standard
6838 makes the label emphasized and
6847 \begin_layout Standard
6848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6856 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6857 lists until you change the definition.
6865 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6867 \begin_inset Index idx
6870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6871 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6879 \begin_layout Standard
6880 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6883 \begin_layout Enumerate
6884 \begin_inset Argument 1
6887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6906 \begin_inset Note Note
6909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6910 goes back to default numbering
6918 \begin_layout Enumerate
6922 \begin_layout Standard
6926 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6930 \begin_layout Standard
6931 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6936 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6937 to indicate that it is a resumed
6938 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6939 , but in the output.
6942 \begin_layout Standard
6943 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6951 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6960 \begin_layout Standard
6961 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6963 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6964 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6965 of a normal enumeration.
6966 There, insert the command
6969 \begin_layout Standard
6975 \begin_layout Standard
6980 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6984 \begin_layout Enumerate
6988 \begin_layout Enumerate
6992 \begin_layout Standard
6993 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6996 \begin_layout Enumerate
6997 \begin_inset Argument 1
7000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7016 This enumeration starts at 4
7019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7021 \begin_inset Index idx
7024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7033 \begin_layout Standard
7034 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7036 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7039 \begin_layout Itemize
7043 \begin_layout Itemize
7044 with standard spacing
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7048 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7050 Add there the command
7054 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7057 \begin_layout Itemize
7058 \begin_inset Argument 1
7061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 \begin_layout Itemize
7084 \begin_layout Itemize
7088 \begin_layout Standard
7089 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7096 \begin_inset Index idx
7099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7101 -packages ! enumitem
7107 For more information see its documentation,
7108 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7117 \begin_layout Standard
7118 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7120 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7121 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7125 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7128 \begin_layout Enumerate
7129 \begin_inset Argument 1
7132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7140 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7153 \begin_layout Enumerate
7154 with negative indentation
7157 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7158 Further Customization
7159 \begin_inset Index idx
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7163 Lists ! Customization
7171 \begin_layout Standard
7172 You can also change the style of description lists.
7176 \begin_layout Standard
7182 \begin_layout Standard
7183 changes the description label font, the command
7186 \begin_layout Standard
7192 \begin_layout Standard
7193 sets the list style.
7196 \begin_layout Standard
7197 An example where the command
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7205 itshape, style=nextline
7208 \begin_layout Standard
7212 \begin_layout Description
7214 \begin_inset space ~
7218 \begin_inset Argument 1
7221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7227 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7229 itshape, style=nextline
7239 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7240 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7244 \begin_layout Description
7246 \begin_inset space ~
7249 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7250 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7251 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7254 \begin_layout Standard
7255 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7261 \begin_inset Index idx
7264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7266 -packages ! enumitem
7272 For more information see its documentation
7273 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7282 \begin_layout Subsection
7284 \begin_inset Index idx
7287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7296 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7298 \begin_inset space ~
7301 Address: An Overview
7304 \begin_layout Standard
7305 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7306 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7314 \begin_inset space ~
7320 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7321 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7322 gags on the document.
7323 In contrast, you can use the
7330 \begin_inset space ~
7335 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7336 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 Of course, you're not limited to using
7348 \begin_inset space ~
7357 \begin_inset space ~
7362 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7363 some European academic papers.
7366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7370 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7382 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7383 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7387 \begin_inset space ~
7392 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7393 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7394 Here's an example of each:
7397 \begin_layout Right Address
7399 \begin_inset Newline newline
7403 \begin_inset Newline newline
7407 \begin_inset Newline newline
7410 When is it? What is today?
7413 \begin_layout Standard
7417 \begin_inset space ~
7423 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7425 the largest block of text on a single line.
7426 Here's an example of the
7433 \begin_layout Address
7435 \begin_inset Newline newline
7438 Where do I send this
7439 \begin_inset Newline newline
7442 Your post office and country
7445 \begin_layout Standard
7446 As you can see, both
7453 \begin_inset space ~
7458 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7463 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7464 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7470 This makes sense, since
7478 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7479 Thus, you have to use
7486 arg "newline-insert newline"
7491 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7492 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7494 \begin_inset space ~
7498 \begin_inset space ~
7503 ) to start a new line in an
7510 \begin_inset space ~
7518 \begin_layout Subsection
7522 \begin_layout Standard
7523 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7524 or list of references.
7526 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7529 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7531 \begin_inset Index idx
7534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7543 \begin_layout Standard
7548 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7549 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7550 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7551 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7565 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7566 The book document classes ignores the
7570 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7574 in a letter document class.
7577 \begin_layout Standard
7582 environment does several things for you.
7583 First, it puts the centered label
7584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7592 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7594 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7595 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7596 the subsequent text.
7597 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7599 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7603 \begin_layout Standard
7604 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7608 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7609 The new paragraph will still be in the
7614 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7615 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7618 \begin_layout Standard
7619 \begin_inset Float figure
7624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7626 \begin_inset Graphics
7627 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7635 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7640 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7661 \begin_layout Standard
7662 We would love to demonstrate the
7666 environment, but since this document is in the
7667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7674 class, we can't do this.
7675 We inserted it therefore as figure
7676 \begin_inset space ~
7680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7682 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7687 If you have never heard of an
7688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7695 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7712 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7719 \begin_layout Standard
7724 environment is used to list references.
7725 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7726 only use it at the end of the document.
7738 \begin_layout Standard
7739 When you first open a
7743 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7744 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7760 depending on the document class.
7761 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7762 Each paragraph of the
7766 environment is a bibliography entry.
7771 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7772 Each new paragraph is still in the
7779 \begin_layout Standard
7780 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7781 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7783 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7785 handling, have a look at section
7786 \begin_inset space ~
7790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7792 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7799 \begin_layout Subsection
7800 Special Environments
7803 \begin_layout Standard
7805 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7806 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7809 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7814 \begin_inset Index idx
7817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7827 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7834 \begin_layout Standard
7840 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7842 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7847 key as a fixed whitespace.
7851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7864 \begin_inset space ~
7869 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7887 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7890 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7893 arg "newline-insert newline"
7910 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7911 So, when you finish using the
7916 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7917 Also, you can nest the
7922 environment inside of others.
7925 \begin_layout Standard
7926 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7929 \begin_layout Itemize
7933 arg "newline-insert newline"
7936 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7941 \begin_inset space \space{}
7951 arg "newline-insert newline"
7957 \begin_layout Itemize
7961 arg "newline-insert newline"
7971 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7977 \begin_layout Itemize
7978 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7979 You must put at least one
7983 in any line you want blank.
7984 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
7988 \begin_layout Itemize
7989 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7993 since that will insert
7998 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8001 arg "self-insert \""
8007 \begin_layout Standard
8011 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8015 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8019 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8023 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8027 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8028 printf("Hello World!
8033 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8037 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8041 \begin_layout Standard
8042 This is just the standard
8043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8054 \begin_layout Standard
8060 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8062 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8063 as if you used a typewriter.
8064 \begin_inset Index idx
8067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8068 Paragraph environments|)
8073 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8076 Program Code Listings
8081 \begin_inset space ~
8089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8093 \begin_inset Index idx
8096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8105 \begin_layout Standard
8110 environment is similar to the
8115 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8116 computer console text.
8121 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8135 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8136 you can have empty lines.
8149 \begin_layout Itemize
8150 have a certain language and a text style
8153 \begin_layout Itemize
8154 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8155 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8156 and \SpecialChar TeX
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8161 Because of these properties
8165 works like a typewriter.
8169 \begin_layout Verbatim
8173 \begin_layout Verbatim
8176 The following 2 lines are empty:
8179 \begin_layout Verbatim
8183 \begin_layout Verbatim
8187 \begin_layout Verbatim
8188 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8193 \begin_layout Standard
8198 environment is identical to
8202 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8203 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8210 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8214 \begin_layout Section
8215 Nesting Environments
8216 \begin_inset Index idx
8219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8220 Nesting ! Environments
8226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8235 \begin_layout Subsection
8239 \begin_layout Standard
8241 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8243 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8245 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8247 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8259 \begin_layout Enumerate
8263 \begin_layout Enumerate
8268 \begin_layout Enumerate
8272 \begin_layout Enumerate
8277 \begin_layout Enumerate
8281 \begin_layout Standard
8282 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8283 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8285 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8287 \begin_inset space ~
8291 \begin_inset space ~
8299 \begin_inset space ~
8303 \begin_inset space ~
8308 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8310 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8313 arg "depth-increment"
8319 arg "depth-decrement"
8333 arg "depth-increment"
8339 arg "depth-decrement"
8343 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8344 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8348 \begin_layout Standard
8349 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8350 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8351 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8352 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8353 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8356 \begin_layout Standard
8357 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8359 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8361 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8364 \begin_layout Subsection
8365 What You Can and Can't Nest
8368 \begin_layout Standard
8369 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8370 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8373 \begin_layout Standard
8374 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8375 than a simple yes or no.
8376 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8379 \begin_layout Itemize
8380 Completely unnestable
8383 \begin_layout Itemize
8384 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8388 \begin_layout Itemize
8389 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8393 \begin_layout Standard
8394 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8395 environments have them:
8398 \begin_layout Description
8399 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8400 Can't nest into them.
8404 \begin_layout Itemize
8410 \begin_layout Itemize
8416 \begin_layout Itemize
8422 \begin_layout Itemize
8428 \begin_layout Itemize
8435 \begin_layout Description
8437 \begin_inset space ~
8440 Nestable You can nest them.
8441 You can nest other things into them.
8445 \begin_layout Itemize
8451 \begin_layout Itemize
8457 \begin_layout Itemize
8463 \begin_layout Itemize
8469 \begin_layout Itemize
8475 \begin_layout Itemize
8481 \begin_layout Itemize
8487 \begin_layout Itemize
8494 \begin_layout Itemize
8500 \begin_layout Itemize
8507 \begin_layout Description
8508 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8509 You can't nest anything into them.
8513 \begin_layout Itemize
8519 \begin_layout Itemize
8525 \begin_layout Itemize
8531 \begin_layout Itemize
8537 \begin_layout Itemize
8543 \begin_layout Itemize
8549 \begin_layout Itemize
8555 \begin_layout Itemize
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8567 \begin_layout Itemize
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8591 \begin_layout Itemize
8595 \begin_inset space ~
8601 \begin_layout Itemize
8608 \begin_layout Standard
8609 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8617 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8627 \begin_inset space ~
8630 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8631 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8632 nested section headings violate this.
8640 \begin_layout Subsection
8641 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8642 \begin_inset Index idx
8645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8646 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8654 \begin_layout Standard
8655 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8656 affected by nesting anyhow.
8660 \begin_layout Itemize
8664 \begin_layout Itemize
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8672 \begin_layout Standard
8674 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8682 Figures and tables in
8686 are not affected by this.
8691 Have a look at section
8692 \begin_inset space ~
8696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8698 reference "sec:Floats"
8702 for more information about
8709 \begin_layout Standard
8711 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8712 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8716 \begin_layout Standard
8717 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8725 of its own, it behaves just like a
8726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8733 paragraph environment.
8734 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8738 \begin_layout Standard
8739 Here's an example with a table:
8742 \begin_layout Enumerate
8747 \begin_layout Enumerate
8748 This is (a) and it's nested.
8752 \begin_layout Standard
8753 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8759 \begin_layout Standard
8761 \begin_inset Tabular
8762 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8763 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8764 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8765 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8849 \begin_layout Standard
8850 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8857 \begin_layout Enumerate
8859 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8863 \begin_layout Enumerate
8867 \begin_layout Standard
8868 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8871 \begin_layout Enumerate
8876 \begin_layout Enumerate
8877 This is (a) and it's nested.
8881 \begin_layout Standard
8882 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8888 \begin_layout Standard
8890 \begin_inset Tabular
8891 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8892 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8893 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8894 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8978 \begin_layout Standard
8979 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8985 \begin_layout Enumerate
8992 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8995 \begin_layout Enumerate
8999 \begin_layout Standard
9000 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9004 \begin_layout Standard
9005 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9008 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9011 \begin_layout Enumerate
9016 \begin_layout Enumerate
9017 This is (a) and it's nested.
9020 \begin_layout Standard
9021 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9027 \begin_layout Standard
9029 \begin_inset Tabular
9030 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9031 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9032 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9033 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9118 \begin_layout Standard
9119 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9125 \begin_layout Enumerate
9127 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9134 \begin_layout Enumerate
9138 \begin_layout Standard
9139 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9145 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9146 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9150 \begin_layout Subsection
9151 Usage and General Features
9154 \begin_layout Standard
9155 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9156 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9165 is the innermost possible depth.
9166 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9169 \begin_layout Enumerate
9170 level #1 – outermost
9174 \begin_layout Enumerate
9179 \begin_layout Enumerate
9184 \begin_layout Enumerate
9189 \begin_layout Itemize
9194 \begin_layout Itemize
9203 \begin_layout Standard
9204 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9205 both of them in the example.
9206 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9216 For example, if we tried to nest another
9221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9228 , we would get errors.
9231 \begin_layout Subsection
9233 \begin_inset Index idx
9236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9245 \begin_layout Standard
9246 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9247 We have several examples of nested environments.
9248 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9252 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9253 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9256 \begin_layout Labeling
9257 \labelwidthstring MMM
9258 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9267 \begin_layout Labeling
9268 \labelwidthstring MMM
9269 #2-a This is level #2.
9270 We created it by using
9273 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9279 arg "depth-increment"
9286 \begin_layout Labeling
9287 \labelwidthstring MMM
9288 #3-a This is level #3.
9289 This time, we just enter
9296 arg "depth-increment"
9300 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9304 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9310 arg "depth-increment"
9317 \begin_layout Standard
9322 environment, nested inside of
9323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9331 So, it's at level #4.
9332 We did this by entering
9335 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9341 arg "depth-increment"
9344 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9349 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9365 \begin_layout Standard
9370 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9373 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9379 \begin_layout Labeling
9380 \labelwidthstring MMM
9381 #4-a This is level #4.
9385 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9388 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9393 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9397 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9402 keep nesting things inside
9403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9414 \begin_layout Labeling
9415 \labelwidthstring MMM
9416 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9421 \begin_layout Labeling
9422 \labelwidthstring MMM
9423 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9424 and this is level #6.
9425 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9429 \begin_layout Labeling
9430 \labelwidthstring MMM
9431 #5-b Back to level #5.
9435 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9441 arg "depth-decrement"
9448 \begin_layout Labeling
9449 \labelwidthstring MMM
9453 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9459 arg "depth-decrement"
9462 , we're back at level #4.
9466 \begin_layout Labeling
9467 \labelwidthstring MMM
9468 #3-b Back to level #3.
9469 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9473 \begin_layout Labeling
9474 \labelwidthstring MMM
9475 #2-b Back to level #2.
9480 \begin_layout Labeling
9481 \labelwidthstring MMM
9482 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9483 After this sentence, we will enter
9487 and change the paragraph environment back to
9494 \begin_layout Standard
9495 We could have also used the
9511 environment in place of the
9516 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9520 Example 2: Inheritance
9523 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9524 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9527 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9536 arg "depth-increment"
9540 \begin_inset Newline newline
9543 which, we will change to the
9551 \begin_layout Enumerate
9556 environment, at level #2.
9559 \begin_layout Enumerate
9560 Notice how the nested
9564 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9568 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9572 \begin_layout Standard
9573 We ended this example by entering
9578 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9582 and reset the nesting depth by using
9585 arg "depth-decrement"
9591 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9592 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9601 \begin_inset Argument 1
9604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9605 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9613 \begin_layout Enumerate
9614 This is level #1, in an
9618 paragraph environment.
9619 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9623 \begin_layout Enumerate
9628 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9634 arg "depth-increment"
9638 Now, what happens if we nest an
9642 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9643 label be? An asterisk?
9647 \begin_layout Itemize
9657 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9658 So, its label is a bullet.
9659 (We got here by using
9662 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9668 arg "depth-increment"
9671 , then changing the environment to
9679 \begin_layout Itemize
9680 Here's level #4, produced using
9683 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9689 arg "depth-increment"
9693 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9698 \begin_layout Enumerate
9701 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9706 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9710 , because we are in the
9718 environment (that is, it is an
9733 \begin_layout Enumerate
9738 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9739 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9743 \begin_layout Enumerate
9744 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9747 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9750 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9753 \begin_layout Enumerate
9757 arg "depth-decrement"
9760 to decrease the depth after the next
9763 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9770 \begin_layout Enumerate
9772 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9777 \begin_layout Enumerate
9779 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9780 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9784 \begin_layout Enumerate
9785 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9794 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9799 reset the counter for the label.
9803 \begin_layout Enumerate
9807 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9813 arg "depth-decrement"
9816 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9817 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9818 into the twofold-nested
9826 \begin_layout Enumerate
9827 The same thing happens if we do another
9830 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9836 arg "depth-decrement"
9839 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9842 \begin_layout Standard
9843 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9848 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9863 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9870 The same rule applies for the
9874 environment, as well.
9877 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9878 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9881 \begin_layout Enumerate
9882 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9883 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9884 the same detail with how we did it.
9893 \begin_layout Standard
9901 arg "depth-increment"
9908 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9909 the example in parentheses someplace.
9910 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9911 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9912 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9916 \begin_layout Enumerate
9921 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9926 Now we will add verse.
9927 \begin_inset Newline newline
9930 It will get much worse.
9931 \begin_inset Newline newline
9941 arg "depth-increment"
9952 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9953 \begin_inset Newline newline
9956 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9957 \begin_inset Newline newline
9963 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9976 \begin_layout Standard
9977 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9983 \begin_layout Standard
9985 \begin_inset Tabular
9986 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9987 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9988 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9989 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10074 \begin_layout Verse
10078 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10088 arg "depth-increment"
10094 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10108 arg "depth-decrement"
10115 \begin_layout Enumerate
10120 : level #1) This is another item.
10121 Note that selecting a
10125 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10126 3 times to put the table inside the
10134 \begin_layout Quotation
10135 We're now ending the
10139 list and changing to
10144 We're still at level #1.
10145 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10146 The next set of paragraphs is a
10147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10154 We will nest both the
10161 \begin_inset space ~
10166 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10170 for the letter body.
10174 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10177 to preserve the depth.
10178 Remember that you need to use
10181 arg "newline-insert newline"
10184 to create multiple lines inside the
10191 \begin_inset space ~
10201 \begin_layout Right Address
10203 \begin_inset Newline newline
10206 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10207 \begin_inset Newline newline
10213 \begin_layout Address
10215 \begin_inset space ~
10221 \begin_layout Quotation
10222 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10226 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10227 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10228 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10229 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10230 as soon as possible.
10231 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10234 \begin_layout Quotation
10235 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10236 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10237 with your order, along with payment.
10240 \begin_layout Quotation
10241 We thank you again for your patience.
10244 \begin_layout Address
10246 \begin_inset Newline newline
10253 \begin_layout Quotation
10254 That ends that example!
10257 \begin_layout Standard
10258 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10259 gives you a lot of power with just
10261 We could have easily nested an
10282 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10285 \begin_layout Subsection
10287 \begin_inset Index idx
10290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10291 Nesting ! Separation
10297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10299 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10306 \begin_layout Standard
10307 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10309 For example you need two different enumerations:
10312 \begin_layout Enumerate
10317 \begin_layout Enumerate
10322 \begin_layout Enumerate
10326 \begin_layout Standard
10327 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10333 \begin_layout Itemize
10339 \begin_layout Standard
10340 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10346 \begin_layout Enumerate
10350 \begin_layout Enumerate
10354 \begin_layout Enumerate
10358 \begin_layout Standard
10359 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10360 list item and use the menu
10362 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10363 Start New Environment
10366 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10368 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10371 arg "paragraph-break"
10375 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10376 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10377 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10378 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10381 \begin_layout Standard
10382 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10385 arg "paragraph-break"
10388 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10391 \begin_layout Section
10392 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10393 \begin_inset Index idx
10396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10405 \begin_layout Standard
10406 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10407 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10409 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10410 be broken at the end of a line.
10411 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10415 \begin_layout Subsection
10417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10419 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10424 \begin_inset Index idx
10427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10436 \begin_layout Standard
10437 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10438 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10439 ) not to break the line at
10441 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10444 \begin_layout Quote
10445 Further documentation is given in section
10446 \begin_inset Newline newline
10450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10452 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10460 \begin_layout Standard
10461 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10476 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10485 A protected space is set with
10487 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10488 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10490 \begin_inset space ~
10498 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10504 \begin_layout Subsection
10506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10508 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10513 \begin_inset Index idx
10516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10517 Spacing ! Horizontal
10525 \begin_layout Standard
10526 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10528 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10529 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10533 The length units are listed in Appendix
10534 \begin_inset space ~
10538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10540 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10547 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10551 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10556 \begin_inset Index idx
10559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10560 Spaces ! Inter-word
10568 \begin_layout Standard
10569 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10570 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10571 at the ends of sentences.
10572 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10573 automatically takes care about this.
10574 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10575 followed by a period; see section
10576 \begin_inset space ~
10580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10582 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10587 To insert a normal space, select
10589 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10590 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10592 \begin_inset space ~
10600 arg "space-insert normal"
10606 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10610 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10615 \begin_inset Index idx
10618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10627 \begin_layout Standard
10629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10636 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10645 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10646 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10647 inside abbreviations:
10650 \begin_layout Quote
10652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10656 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10659 \begin_layout Standard
10660 or between values and units.
10661 Compare for example this:
10662 \begin_inset Newline newline
10666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10670 \begin_inset Newline newline
10673 10 kg (normal space
10676 \begin_layout Standard
10677 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10680 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10682 \begin_inset space ~
10690 arg "space-insert thin"
10696 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10700 \begin_layout Standard
10701 You can also insert the following space types:
10704 \begin_layout Description
10706 \begin_inset space ~
10710 \begin_inset space ~
10713 space A line with a
10714 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10718 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10722 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10725 negative thin space between the arrows.
10728 \begin_layout Description
10730 \begin_inset space ~
10734 \begin_inset space ~
10737 space A line with a
10738 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10742 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10746 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10749 negative medium space between the arrows.
10752 \begin_layout Description
10754 \begin_inset space ~
10758 \begin_inset space ~
10761 space A line with a
10762 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10766 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10770 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10773 negative thick space between the arrows.
10776 \begin_layout Description
10778 \begin_inset space ~
10782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10786 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10790 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10794 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10798 \begin_inset space ~
10802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10805 em) space between the arrows.
10808 \begin_layout Description
10810 \begin_inset space ~
10814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10818 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10822 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10826 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10830 \begin_inset space ~
10834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10837 em) space between the arrows.
10840 \begin_layout Description
10842 \begin_inset space ~
10846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10850 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10854 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10858 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10862 \begin_inset space ~
10866 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10869 em) space between the arrows.
10872 \begin_layout Description
10874 \begin_inset space ~
10878 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10882 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10887 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10891 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10894 cm space between the arrows.
10897 \begin_layout Standard
10899 \begin_inset space ~
10903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10905 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10909 lists the different space sizes.
10912 \begin_layout Standard
10913 \begin_inset Float table
10918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10919 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10922 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10924 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10928 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10938 \begin_inset Tabular
10939 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10940 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10941 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10942 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11058 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11153 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11181 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11215 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11217 \begin_inset Index idx
11220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11229 \begin_layout Standard
11230 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11231 feature for adding extra space
11232 in a uniform fashion.
11233 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11234 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11235 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11236 equally between themselves.
11239 \begin_layout Standard
11240 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11243 \begin_layout Quote
11245 This is on the left side
11246 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11249 This is on the right
11252 \begin_layout Quote
11255 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11259 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11265 \begin_layout Quote
11268 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11272 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11276 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11282 \begin_layout Standard
11283 That was an example in the
11289 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11293 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11297 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11300 is one in a standard paragraph.
11301 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11305 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11308 \begin_layout Standard
11309 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11312 \begin_inset space ~
11317 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11320 \begin_layout Standard
11322 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11326 \begin_inset space ~
11332 \begin_layout Standard
11334 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11338 \begin_inset space ~
11344 \begin_layout Standard
11346 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11350 \begin_inset space ~
11356 \begin_layout Standard
11358 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11362 \begin_inset space ~
11368 \begin_layout Standard
11370 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11374 \begin_inset space ~
11380 \begin_layout Standard
11382 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11386 \begin_inset space ~
11392 \begin_layout Standard
11393 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11401 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11405 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11407 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11408 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11412 option in the space dialog.
11420 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11424 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11429 \begin_inset Index idx
11432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11441 \begin_layout Standard
11442 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11443 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11446 \begin_layout Standard
11447 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11450 What is correct English?:
11451 \begin_inset Newline newline
11455 \begin_inset Newline newline
11459 \begin_inset space ~
11462 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11463 \begin_inset Newline newline
11467 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11478 \begin_inset Newline newline
11482 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11493 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11499 \begin_layout Standard
11501 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11506 \begin_inset space ~
11510 \begin_inset space ~
11514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11518 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11520 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11521 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11525 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11531 \begin_inset space ~
11535 \begin_inset space ~
11539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11542 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11551 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11552 That is why it is named
11553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11561 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11562 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11566 \begin_layout Subsection
11568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11570 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11575 \begin_inset Index idx
11578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11587 \begin_layout Standard
11588 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11590 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11591 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11593 \begin_inset space ~
11599 There you find the following sizes:
11602 \begin_layout Standard
11615 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11616 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11621 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11623 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11624 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11626 \begin_inset space ~
11632 \begin_inset Index idx
11635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11636 Document ! Settings
11641 for the paragraph separation.
11642 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11653 \begin_layout Standard
11659 \begin_inset Index idx
11662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11668 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11669 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11674 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11675 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11684 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11693 s are described in section
11694 \begin_inset space ~
11698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11700 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11709 If there are several
11713 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11714 You can therefore use
11718 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11721 \begin_layout Standard
11726 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11727 \begin_inset space ~
11731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11733 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11740 \begin_layout Standard
11741 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11751 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11752 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11764 \begin_layout Subsection
11765 Paragraph Alignment
11766 \begin_inset Index idx
11769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11770 Paragraph ! Alignment
11778 \begin_layout Standard
11779 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11781 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11784 dialog (toolbar button
11787 arg "layout-paragraph"
11791 There are five possibilities:
11794 \begin_layout Itemize
11802 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11808 \begin_layout Itemize
11816 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11822 \begin_layout Itemize
11830 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11836 \begin_layout Itemize
11844 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11850 \begin_layout Itemize
11858 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11864 \begin_layout Standard
11865 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11866 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11867 the left and right margins.
11868 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11871 \begin_layout Standard
11873 This paragraph is right aligned,
11876 \begin_layout Standard
11878 this one is centered,
11881 \begin_layout Standard
11883 this one is left aligned.
11886 \begin_layout Subsection
11888 \begin_inset Index idx
11891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11892 Page breaks ! Forced
11898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11900 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11907 \begin_layout Standard
11908 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11909 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11910 force a page break where you want one.
11911 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11912 is good at page breaking.
11913 Only if you use a lot of
11917 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11918 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11921 \begin_layout Standard
11922 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11923 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11927 have to change the page breaking.
11930 \begin_layout Standard
11931 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11933 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11935 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11936 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11938 \begin_inset space ~
11944 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11946 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11947 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11949 \begin_inset space ~
11954 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11956 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11957 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11960 \begin_layout Standard
11961 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11962 at the top of a page.
11963 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11965 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11966 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11967 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11971 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11975 to learn more about
11982 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11986 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11991 \begin_inset Index idx
11994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11995 Page breaks ! Clear
12003 \begin_layout Standard
12004 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12005 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12006 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12007 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12008 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12011 \begin_layout Standard
12012 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12014 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12015 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12017 \begin_inset space ~
12023 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12025 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12026 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12028 \begin_inset space ~
12032 \begin_inset space ~
12037 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12038 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12041 \begin_layout Subsection
12043 \begin_inset Index idx
12046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12055 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12062 \begin_layout Standard
12063 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12065 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12067 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12068 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12070 \begin_inset space ~
12074 \begin_inset space ~
12082 arg "newline-insert newline"
12086 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12088 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12089 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12091 \begin_inset space ~
12095 \begin_inset space ~
12103 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12106 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12108 This is useful to avoid
12109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12116 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12119 \begin_layout Standard
12120 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12121 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12123 very good at line breaking.
12124 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12125 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12126 \begin_inset space ~
12130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12132 reference "sec:Quote"
12137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12139 reference "sec:Verse"
12144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12146 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12153 \begin_layout Subsection
12155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12157 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12162 \begin_inset Index idx
12165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12174 \begin_layout Standard
12176 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12187 \begin_layout Standard
12191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12192 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12194 \begin_inset space ~
12199 you can insert horizontal lines.
12200 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12201 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12202 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12205 \begin_layout Standard
12207 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12218 \begin_layout Section
12219 Characters and Symbols
12222 \begin_layout Standard
12223 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12224 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12225 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12233 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12237 for information on how this is done.
12240 \begin_layout Standard
12241 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12246 dialog via the menu
12248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12249 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12255 \begin_layout Standard
12256 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12264 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12265 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12267 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12275 \begin_layout Section
12276 Fonts and Text Styles
12277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12279 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12286 \begin_layout Subsection
12288 \begin_inset Index idx
12291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12300 \begin_layout Standard
12301 There are two types of fonts:
12304 \begin_layout Description
12306 \begin_inset space ~
12310 \begin_inset Index idx
12313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12319 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12324 characters) in the font.
12325 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12326 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12327 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12328 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12329 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12330 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12331 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12332 \begin_inset Newline newline
12335 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12336 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12337 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12338 sizes than at small ones.
12339 \begin_inset Newline newline
12353 \begin_inset space ~
12361 \begin_layout Description
12363 \begin_inset space ~
12367 \begin_inset Index idx
12370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12376 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12377 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12378 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12379 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12380 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12381 image manipulation program.
12382 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12383 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12384 \begin_inset space ~
12387 pixels high up to 34
12388 \begin_inset space ~
12391 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12392 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12393 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12395 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12396 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12397 \begin_inset Newline newline
12400 Bitmap fonts are named
12403 \begin_inset space ~
12408 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12411 \begin_layout Standard
12412 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12413 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12414 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12415 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12416 use scalable fonts.
12419 \begin_layout Standard
12420 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12423 \begin_layout Standard
12424 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12425 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12426 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12427 font to emphasize text, you use an
12428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12436 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12438 In \SpecialChar LyX
12439 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12443 \begin_layout Subsection
12446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12448 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12455 \begin_layout Standard
12456 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12457 used its own fonts.
12458 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12459 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12462 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12463 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12464 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12465 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12466 to a word processor.
12467 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12468 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12469 files are very portable across
12470 different machines.
12471 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12472 has increased a lot
12473 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12476 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12478 \begin_inset space ~
12482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12484 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12489 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12490 code in the document
12491 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12494 \begin_layout Standard
12495 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12496 engines that are also able directly
12497 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12499 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12501 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12503 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12504 that is installed on your system.
12505 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12508 \begin_layout Standard
12509 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12517 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12518 es; so you might have to experiment.
12526 \begin_layout Subsection
12527 Document Font and Font size
12528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12530 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12535 \begin_inset Index idx
12538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12545 \begin_inset Index idx
12548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12557 \begin_layout Standard
12558 You can set the document fonts in the
12560 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12564 \begin_inset Index idx
12567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12568 Document ! Settings
12578 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12579 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12582 \begin_inset space ~
12591 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12593 \begin_inset space ~
12596 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12599 \begin_layout Standard
12604 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12605 This requires that you use
12617 as the output format, i.
12618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12622 \begin_inset space \space{}
12625 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12626 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12627 installed (see section
12628 \begin_inset space ~
12632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12634 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12639 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12641 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12642 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12644 \begin_inset space ~
12647 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12648 cannot determine the family.
12649 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12650 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12653 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12656 \begin_layout Standard
12657 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12658 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12663 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12669 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12670 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12678 \begin_inset space ~
12684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12697 European Computer Modern
12700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12707 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12710 \begin_layout Standard
12719 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12720 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12725 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12728 \begin_inset space ~
12733 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12739 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12740 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12743 \begin_layout Itemize
12747 \begin_inset space ~
12752 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12765 \begin_inset space ~
12770 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12771 community in order to replace
12775 as the default font.
12776 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12777 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12780 \begin_inset space ~
12793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12794 One difference is improved kerning.
12802 \begin_layout Itemize
12806 \begin_inset space ~
12810 \begin_inset space ~
12815 fonts in (the rare) case that
12818 \begin_inset space ~
12823 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12838 Virtual means that it
12839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12850 -glyphs from other fonts.
12851 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12873 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12879 \begin_inset Index idx
12882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12884 -packages ! aeguill
12889 with the document preamble line
12890 \begin_inset Newline newline
12897 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12898 \begin_inset Newline newline
12903 will fix the guillemet problem.
12908 and that accented characters are not
12912 glyph, but built of
12916 characters, the accent and the letter.
12917 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12923 If you search for example for the French word
12924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12931 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12940 and not for the glyph
12941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12945 \begin_inset space ~
12949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12955 \begin_layout Itemize
12956 If you do not like the look of
12964 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12969 \begin_inset space ~
12975 \begin_inset space ~
12985 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12986 \begin_inset space ~
12989 serif and typewriter fonts,
12993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12994 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13001 \begin_inset space ~
13010 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13015 \begin_inset space \space{}
13023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13027 \begin_inset space \space{}
13033 \begin_inset space ~
13041 \begin_inset space ~
13051 but you can also select your own.
13052 \begin_inset Newline newline
13055 The differences between roman,
13058 \begin_inset space ~
13067 fonts are explained in section
13068 \begin_inset space ~
13072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13074 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13079 \begin_inset Newline newline
13085 \begin_inset space ~
13090 was originally designed for newspapers.
13091 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13092 into the small newspaper columns.
13096 \begin_inset space ~
13101 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13104 \begin_layout Standard
13105 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13118 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13123 depends on the class you are using.
13124 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13127 \begin_layout Standard
13128 Note that the font size is the
13133 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13134 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13135 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13136 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13139 \begin_inset space ~
13145 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13146 \begin_inset space ~
13150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13152 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13159 \begin_layout Standard
13163 \begin_inset space ~
13168 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13170 \begin_inset space ~
13173 serif or typewriter.
13178 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13188 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13191 \begin_layout Standard
13196 LaTeX font encoding
13198 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13199 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13205 \begin_inset Index idx
13208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13210 -packages ! fontenc
13216 \begin_inset space ~
13220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13222 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13227 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13228 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13235 \begin_layout Standard
13236 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13238 Use Old Style Figures
13242 Use True Small Caps
13245 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13248 Use Old Style Figures
13250 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13252 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13260 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13264 Use True Small Caps
13266 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13267 of scaled capitals.
13268 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13269 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13272 \begin_layout Standard
13277 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13278 a font to display the script characters.
13282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13283 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13289 \begin_inset Index idx
13292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13299 So this has no effect for the document language
13313 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13317 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13325 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13330 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13331 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13333 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13335 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13338 dialog, see section
13339 \begin_inset space ~
13343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13345 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13357 \begin_layout Subsection
13361 \begin_layout Standard
13362 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13363 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13365 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13366 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13367 choose a math font in the dialog
13369 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13373 \begin_inset Index idx
13376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13377 Document ! Settings
13383 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13384 automatically selects a math font.
13385 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13386 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13395 \begin_inset space ~
13401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13406 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13407 document font is available.
13410 \begin_layout Standard
13411 Note that the math font will not be used for
13415 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13421 or by the insertion of the command
13428 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13429 \begin_inset space ~
13433 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13434 while the math characters do not.
13436 \begin_inset space ~
13439 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13442 \begin_inset space ~
13450 \begin_inset space ~
13455 in the document font settings.
13458 \begin_layout Standard
13459 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13460 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13461 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13462 font (in most cases
13463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13469 \begin_inset space ~
13475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13478 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13479 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13487 \begin_inset space ~
13493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13499 \begin_layout Subsection
13500 Using Different Character Styles
13501 \begin_inset Index idx
13504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13511 \begin_inset Index idx
13514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13523 \begin_layout Standard
13524 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13525 automatically changes the character style for certain
13526 paragraph environments.
13528 supports two character styles,
13537 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13541 \begin_layout Standard
13546 style, do one of the following:
13549 \begin_layout Itemize
13550 click on the toolbar button
13559 \begin_layout Itemize
13560 use the key binding
13569 \begin_layout Standard
13570 These commands are all toggles.
13575 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13578 \begin_layout Standard
13579 One typically uses the
13583 style for proper names.
13585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13592 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13600 \begin_layout Standard
13601 A more widely used character style is the
13606 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13613 \begin_layout Itemize
13614 clicking on the toolbar button
13623 \begin_layout Itemize
13624 using the keybindings
13633 \begin_layout Standard
13638 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13640 use a different font.
13643 \begin_layout Standard
13644 We've been using the
13648 style all over the place in this document.
13649 Here's one more example:
13652 \begin_layout Quotation
13655 Do not overuse character styles!
13658 \begin_layout Standard
13659 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13660 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13661 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13662 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13666 \begin_layout Standard
13667 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13675 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13677 \begin_inset space ~
13680 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13686 arg "dialog-show character"
13692 \begin_layout Subsection
13693 Fine-Tuning with the
13698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13700 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13705 \begin_inset Index idx
13708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13717 \begin_layout Standard
13718 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13720 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13721 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13722 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13723 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13724 from ordinary dialog.
13727 \begin_layout Standard
13728 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13729 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13730 \begin_inset Newline newline
13733 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13734 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13737 \begin_layout Standard
13738 To use custom character styles, open the
13740 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13742 \begin_inset space ~
13745 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13748 dialog or press the toolbar button
13751 arg "dialog-show character"
13755 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13756 font property that you can choose.
13757 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13760 \begin_inset space ~
13765 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13770 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13771 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13772 environments all at once.
13775 \begin_layout Standard
13776 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13779 \begin_inset space ~
13791 \begin_layout Labeling
13792 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13806 The possible options are:
13810 \begin_layout Labeling
13811 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13816 This is the Roman font family.
13817 Normally a serif font.
13818 It's also the default family.
13828 \begin_layout Labeling
13829 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13833 \begin_inset space ~
13840 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13852 \begin_layout Labeling
13853 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13860 This is the Typewriter font family.
13866 arg "font-typewriter"
13875 \begin_layout Labeling
13876 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13881 This corresponds to the print weight.
13886 \begin_layout Labeling
13887 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13892 This is the Medium font series.
13893 It's also the default series.
13896 \begin_layout Labeling
13897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13904 This is the Bold font series.
13917 \begin_layout Labeling
13918 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13923 As the name implies.
13928 \begin_layout Labeling
13929 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13934 This is the Upright font shape.
13935 It's also the default shape.
13938 \begin_layout Labeling
13939 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13953 s the Italic font shape
13959 \begin_layout Labeling
13960 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13967 This is the Slanted font shape
13969 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13970 , this is different from italic).
13973 \begin_layout Labeling
13974 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13978 \begin_inset space ~
13985 This is the Small caps font shape
13992 \begin_layout Labeling
13993 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13998 Alters the text color.
13999 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14003 \begin_inset space ~
14008 , which means that the document default color set in
14010 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14011 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14017 \begin_inset space ~
14022 is used, you can choose between
14099 \begin_inset Index idx
14102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14111 \begin_layout Labeling
14112 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14117 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14118 the language of the document.
14119 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14120 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14122 \begin_inset Newline newline
14125 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14127 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14128 When using the spell checking (see section
14129 \begin_inset space ~
14133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14135 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14139 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14142 \begin_layout Labeling
14143 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14148 Alters the size of the font.
14149 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14150 proportional to the document font size.
14151 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14152 the details, but a general description of what
14158 \begin_layout Labeling
14159 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14180 arg "font-size tiny"
14186 \begin_layout Labeling
14187 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14208 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14214 \begin_layout Labeling
14215 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14236 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14242 \begin_layout Labeling
14243 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14264 arg "font-size small"
14270 \begin_layout Labeling
14271 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14285 It's also the default size.
14289 arg "font-size normal"
14295 \begin_layout Labeling
14296 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14317 arg "font-size large"
14323 \begin_layout Labeling
14324 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14345 arg "font-size larger"
14351 \begin_layout Labeling
14352 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14373 arg "font-size largest"
14379 \begin_layout Labeling
14380 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14401 arg "font-size huge"
14407 \begin_layout Labeling
14408 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14429 arg "font-size giant"
14435 \begin_layout Labeling
14436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14441 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14461 arg "font-size increase"
14467 \begin_layout Labeling
14468 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14473 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14493 arg "font-size decrease"
14500 \begin_layout Standard
14505 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14506 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14508 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14509 — use those instead.
14510 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14513 \begin_layout Labeling
14514 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14519 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14524 \begin_layout Labeling
14525 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14532 This is text with emphasize on
14535 This might seem like the same as
14539 , but it is actually a bit different.
14545 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14547 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14550 \begin_layout Labeling
14551 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14558 This is text with Underbar on.
14564 arg "font-underline"
14570 \begin_inset Newline newline
14575 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14576 when you could not change fonts.
14577 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14578 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14579 because some people
14583 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14586 \begin_layout Labeling
14587 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14591 \begin_inset space ~
14598 This is text with Double underbar on.
14604 arg "font-underunderline"
14608 \begin_inset Newline newline
14611 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14612 about double underbar.
14615 \begin_layout Labeling
14616 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14620 \begin_inset space ~
14627 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14633 arg "font-underwave"
14637 \begin_inset Newline newline
14640 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14641 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14644 \begin_layout Labeling
14645 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14652 This is text with Strikeout on.
14658 arg "font-strikeout"
14662 \begin_inset Newline newline
14665 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14666 changed in the meantime.
14669 \begin_layout Labeling
14670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14677 This is text with Noun on.
14684 , this is a logical attribute.
14685 Normally it's equivalent to
14688 \begin_inset space ~
14697 \begin_layout Standard
14698 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14699 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14701 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14703 \begin_inset space ~
14706 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14712 arg "dialog-show character"
14715 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14716 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14719 arg "textstyle-apply"
14723 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14727 \begin_layout Standard
14728 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14735 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14736 (suppose you just set the shape to
14737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14755 \begin_inset space ~
14767 \begin_layout Standard
14768 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14776 \begin_inset space ~
14788 \begin_layout Itemize
14794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14801 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14819 \begin_inset Newline newline
14823 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14837 \begin_inset Note Note
14840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14841 For more on phantoms see section
14842 \begin_inset space ~
14846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14848 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14858 \begin_inset Newline newline
14864 \begin_layout Itemize
14869 fonts use characters with serifs.
14870 These are the small
14871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14878 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14879 The following example shows the difference:
14880 \begin_inset Newline newline
14884 \begin_inset Newline newline
14889 text without serifs
14892 \begin_inset Newline newline
14895 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14896 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14903 \begin_layout Itemize
14908 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14909 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14910 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14913 \begin_layout Standard
14914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14921 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14922 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14925 \begin_inset space ~
14930 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14931 the property to be removed.
14932 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14933 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14934 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14952 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14953 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14961 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14965 \begin_inset space ~
14970 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14981 If you, for example, set
14982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15000 \begin_inset space ~
15005 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15014 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15017 \begin_layout Standard
15018 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15019 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15022 \begin_layout Section
15023 Printing and Previewing
15026 \begin_layout Subsection
15030 \begin_layout Standard
15031 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15032 using \SpecialChar LyX
15033 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15034 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15035 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15036 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15038 Additional Features
15043 \begin_layout Standard
15045 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15048 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15049 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15050 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15053 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15054 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15055 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15056 to turn your writing into printable output.
15057 This happens in two stages:
15060 \begin_layout Enumerate
15061 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15062 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15064 a file with the extension,
15065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15079 \begin_layout Enumerate
15080 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15081 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15082 to use the commands in the
15086 file to produce printable output.
15089 \begin_layout Subsection
15090 Output file formats
15091 \begin_inset Index idx
15094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15103 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15110 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15111 Simple text (ASCII)
15112 \begin_inset Index idx
15115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15116 File formats ! ASCII
15124 \begin_layout Standard
15125 This file type has the extension
15126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15138 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15142 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15149 \begin_layout Standard
15150 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15152 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15153 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15155 \begin_inset space ~
15161 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15162 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15163 bibliography (section
15164 \begin_inset space ~
15168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15170 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15175 If your document includes such material, use
15177 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15178 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15180 \begin_inset space ~
15184 \begin_inset space ~
15188 \begin_inset space ~
15196 \begin_inset space ~
15200 \begin_inset space ~
15206 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15207 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15210 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15213 \begin_inset Index idx
15216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15217 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15226 \begin_layout Standard
15227 This file type has the extension
15228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15239 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15242 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15243 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15244 -Errors or to process it manually
15245 with console commands.
15246 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15247 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15248 's temporary directory whenever you
15249 view or export your document.
15252 \begin_layout Standard
15253 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15254 -file using the menu
15256 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15257 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15261 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15262 export variants are explained in section
15263 \begin_inset space ~
15267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15269 reference "subsec:Export"
15276 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15278 \begin_inset Index idx
15281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15290 \begin_layout Standard
15291 This file type has the extension
15292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15312 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15313 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15314 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15318 \begin_layout Standard
15319 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15320 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15321 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15322 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15323 when you view the DVI.
15324 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15327 \begin_layout Standard
15328 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15330 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15331 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15336 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15337 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15339 \begin_inset space ~
15345 The latter option uses the program
15347 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15353 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15356 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15357 font access (see section
15358 \begin_inset space ~
15362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15364 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15369 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15370 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15375 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15377 \begin_inset Index idx
15380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15381 File formats ! PostScript
15389 \begin_layout Standard
15390 This file type has the extension
15391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15403 PostScript was developed by the company
15407 as a printer language.
15408 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15410 PostScript can be seen as a
15411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15414 programming language
15415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15418 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15423 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15430 \begin_inset Index idx
15433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15435 -packages ! pstricks
15445 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15448 \begin_layout Standard
15449 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15453 Encapsulated PostScript
15454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15457 (EPS, file extension
15458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15470 As \SpecialChar LyX
15471 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15472 convert them in the background to EPS.
15473 If, for example, you have 50
15474 \begin_inset space ~
15477 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15479 \begin_inset space ~
15482 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15483 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15485 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15486 EPS to avoid this problem.
15489 \begin_layout Standard
15490 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15492 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15493 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15499 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15501 \begin_inset Index idx
15504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15511 \begin_inset Index idx
15514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15523 \begin_layout Standard
15524 This file type has the extension
15525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15541 Portable Document Format
15542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15549 was derived from PostScript.
15550 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15559 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15560 looks exactly the same.
15563 \begin_layout Standard
15564 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15568 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15572 (JPG, file extension
15573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15600 Portable Network Graphics
15601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15604 (PNG, file extension
15605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15617 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15618 converts them in the
15619 background to one of these formats.
15620 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15621 will slow down your workflow.
15622 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15625 \begin_layout Standard
15626 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15628 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15634 \begin_layout Description
15636 \begin_inset space ~
15639 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15643 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15646 \begin_layout Description
15648 \begin_inset space ~
15655 ) This uses the program
15657 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15660 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15663 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15666 is a new engine, derived from
15670 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15671 access (see section
15672 \begin_inset space ~
15676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15678 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15683 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15684 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15689 \begin_layout Description
15691 \begin_inset space ~
15698 ) This uses the program
15703 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15709 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15710 font access (see section
15711 \begin_inset space ~
15715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15717 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15722 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15723 vertically written Japanese.
15726 \begin_layout Description
15728 \begin_inset space ~
15731 (cropped) This is the same as
15734 \begin_inset space ~
15739 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15740 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15741 to generate good-looking
15742 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15745 \begin_layout Description
15747 \begin_inset space ~
15750 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15754 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15758 \begin_layout Description
15760 \begin_inset space ~
15763 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15767 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15768 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15772 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15773 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15776 \begin_layout Standard
15780 \begin_inset space ~
15789 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15790 works without problems.
15791 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15792 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15796 \begin_inset space ~
15804 \begin_inset space ~
15809 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15817 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15819 \begin_inset Index idx
15822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15823 FileFormats ! XHTML
15829 \begin_inset Index idx
15832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15841 \begin_layout Standard
15842 This file type has the extension
15843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15855 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15856 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15857 When \SpecialChar LyX
15858 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15859 suitable for the purpose.
15860 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15862 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15863 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15866 between different formats, which are described in section
15868 Math Output in XHTML
15873 \begin_inset space ~
15881 \begin_layout Standard
15882 XHTML output remains
15883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15890 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15891 features are supported yet.
15895 and the World Wide Web
15899 Additional Features
15901 manual, for more information.
15904 \begin_layout Standard
15905 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15907 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15908 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15914 \begin_layout Subsection
15916 \begin_inset Index idx
15919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15928 \begin_layout Standard
15929 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15930 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15939 or use the toolbar button
15946 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15947 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15954 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15958 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15966 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15971 Further output formats can be selected via
15973 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15974 View (Other Formats)
15976 or the toolbar button
15985 \begin_layout Standard
15986 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15987 viewer window using the menu
15989 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15994 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15995 Update (Other Formats)
16000 \begin_layout Standard
16001 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16004 To have a real output, export your document.
16007 \begin_layout Section
16008 A few Words about Typography
16009 \begin_inset Index idx
16012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16021 \begin_layout Subsection
16022 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16023 \begin_inset Index idx
16026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16033 \begin_inset Index idx
16036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16045 \begin_layout Standard
16046 In \SpecialChar LyX
16048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16059 character comes in four lengths: the
16071 , and the minus sign:
16072 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16078 \begin_layout Standard
16079 \begin_inset Tabular
16080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16082 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16083 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16084 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16085 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16114 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16154 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16181 \begin_inset space ~
16184 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16191 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16216 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16218 \begin_inset space ~
16221 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16242 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16276 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16282 \begin_layout Standard
16283 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16295 character multiple times in a row.
16296 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16297 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16330 \begin_layout Standard
16331 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16332 math mode and has a length of its own.
16333 Here are some examples:
16336 \begin_layout Enumerate
16337 line- and page-breaks
16338 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16348 \begin_layout Enumerate
16350 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16360 \begin_layout Enumerate
16361 Oh — there's a dash.
16362 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16372 \begin_layout Enumerate
16373 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16377 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16387 \begin_layout Subsection
16389 \begin_inset Index idx
16392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16401 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16408 \begin_layout Standard
16409 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16410 but automatically in the output.
16411 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16417 \begin_inset Index idx
16420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16427 following the rules of the document language.
16430 \begin_layout Standard
16432 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16436 font and with unusual constructs, like
16437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16445 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16446 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16447 This is done with the menu
16449 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16450 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16452 \begin_inset space ~
16458 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16460 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16464 \begin_layout Standard
16465 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16466 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16477 would then see the hyphen
16478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16485 as a hyphenation possibility.
16486 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16487 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16488 as described in section
16489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16492 Prevent Hyphenation
16493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16499 \begin_inset space ~
16507 \begin_layout Subsection
16509 \begin_inset Index idx
16512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16521 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16522 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16523 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16525 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16532 \begin_layout Standard
16533 When \SpecialChar LyX
16534 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16535 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16537 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16543 appropriate amount of space.
16544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16547 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16549 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16550 gets after another word.
16553 \begin_layout Standard
16554 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16555 not work in all cases.
16557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16568 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16569 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16572 \begin_layout Standard
16573 Here are some examples of
16577 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16580 \begin_layout Itemize
16585 \begin_layout Itemize
16590 \begin_layout Standard
16591 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16594 \begin_layout Itemize
16596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16600 this is too much space!
16603 \begin_layout Itemize
16608 \begin_layout Standard
16609 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16612 \begin_layout Standard
16613 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16616 \begin_layout Enumerate
16620 \begin_inset space ~
16625 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16626 \begin_inset space ~
16630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16632 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16637 \begin_inset Index idx
16640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16641 Spaces ! inter-word
16649 \begin_layout Enumerate
16653 \begin_inset space ~
16658 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16659 \begin_inset space ~
16663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16665 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16670 \begin_inset Index idx
16673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16682 \begin_layout Enumerate
16686 \begin_inset space ~
16690 \begin_inset space ~
16694 \begin_inset space ~
16701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16703 \begin_inset space ~
16708 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16709 This function is also bound to
16712 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16718 \begin_layout Standard
16719 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16722 \begin_layout Itemize
16724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16728 \begin_inset space \space{}
16731 this is too much space!
16734 \begin_layout Itemize
16735 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16739 \begin_layout Standard
16740 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16741 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16743 will take care of this.
16746 \begin_layout Standard
16747 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16751 \begin_inset space ~
16757 feature described in the section
16759 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16764 Additional Features
16769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16771 \begin_inset Index idx
16774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16775 Typography ! Quotes
16781 \begin_inset Index idx
16784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16815 \begin_layout Standard
16817 usually sets quotes correctly.
16818 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16819 and use a closing quote at the end.
16821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16829 The keyboard character,
16833 , generates this automatically.
16836 \begin_layout Standard
16837 You can specify what character the
16841 key produces using the submenu
16847 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16851 \begin_inset Index idx
16854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16855 Document ! Settings
16865 There are six choices:
16868 \begin_layout Labeling
16869 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16892 \begin_layout Labeling
16893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16896 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16900 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16906 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16910 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16916 \begin_layout Labeling
16917 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16920 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16924 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16930 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16934 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16940 \begin_layout Labeling
16941 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16944 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16948 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16954 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16958 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16964 \begin_layout Labeling
16965 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16968 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16972 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16978 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16982 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16988 \begin_layout Labeling
16989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16992 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16996 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17002 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17006 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17012 \begin_layout Standard
17013 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17016 arg "quote-insert single"
17022 \begin_layout Subsection
17024 \begin_inset Index idx
17027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17028 Typography ! Ligatures
17034 \begin_inset Index idx
17037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17068 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17075 \begin_layout Standard
17076 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17077 print them as single characters.
17078 These groups are known as
17083 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17084 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17086 Here are the standard ligatures:
17089 \begin_layout Itemize
17093 \begin_layout Itemize
17097 \begin_layout Itemize
17101 \begin_layout Itemize
17105 \begin_layout Itemize
17109 \begin_layout Standard
17110 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17113 \begin_layout Standard
17114 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17115 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17123 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17139 To break a ligature, use
17141 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17142 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17144 \begin_inset space ~
17151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17162 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17179 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17187 \begin_layout Subsection
17189 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17191 \begin_inset Index idx
17194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17204 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17211 \begin_layout Standard
17214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17215 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17219 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17222 \begin_layout Description
17224 The name of the game.
17227 \begin_layout Description
17229 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17233 \begin_layout Description
17235 The \SpecialChar TeX
17236 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17240 \begin_layout Description
17241 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17242 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17246 \begin_layout Standard
17247 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17253 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17261 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17262 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17263 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17264 converges to the number
17265 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17268 : The actual version is
17269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17277 , the previous one was
17278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17289 \begin_layout Subsection
17291 \begin_inset Index idx
17294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17303 \begin_layout Standard
17304 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17305 space between two words.
17306 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17316 for units use the menu
17318 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17319 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17321 \begin_inset space ~
17329 arg "space-insert thin"
17335 \begin_layout Standard
17336 Here is an example to show the differences:
17339 \begin_layout Standard
17340 \begin_inset Tabular
17341 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17342 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17343 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17344 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17351 \begin_inset space ~
17355 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17367 space between number and unit
17374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17383 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17395 half space between number and unit
17408 \begin_layout Subsection
17410 \begin_inset Index idx
17413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17414 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17422 \begin_layout Standard
17423 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17425 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17426 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17427 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17428 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17429 These bits of text became known as
17440 \begin_layout Standard
17441 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17442 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17443 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17444 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17445 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17446 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17447 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17448 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17449 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17450 \begin_inset Newline newline
17458 \begin_inset Newline newline
17466 \begin_inset Newline newline
17469 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17470 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17471 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17473 \begin_inset space ~
17477 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17479 key "latexcompanion"
17484 \begin_inset space ~
17488 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17494 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17495 's page break mechanism.
17498 \begin_layout Chapter
17499 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17502 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17509 \begin_layout Standard
17510 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17513 \begin_inset space ~
17519 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17522 \begin_layout Section
17524 \begin_inset Index idx
17527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17543 \begin_layout Standard
17545 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17548 \begin_layout Description
17551 \begin_inset space ~
17554 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17555 \begin_inset Newline newline
17559 \begin_inset Note Note
17562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17563 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17571 \begin_layout Description
17572 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17573 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17574 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17577 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17578 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17580 \begin_inset space ~
17586 \begin_inset Newline newline
17590 \begin_inset Note Comment
17593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17594 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17603 \begin_layout Description
17605 \begin_inset space ~
17608 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17609 set in the document settings under
17611 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17613 \begin_inset space ~
17619 \begin_inset Newline newline
17623 \begin_inset Newline newline
17627 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17636 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17637 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17642 of a comment that appears in the output.
17648 \begin_inset Newline newline
17652 \begin_inset Newline newline
17655 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17658 \begin_layout Standard
17659 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17671 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17674 \begin_layout Section
17676 \begin_inset Index idx
17679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17688 name "sec:Footnotes"
17695 \begin_layout Standard
17697 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17700 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17703 or the toolbar button
17706 arg "footnote-insert"
17718 \begin_inset Graphics
17719 filename clipart/footnote.png
17728 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17729 's representation of your footnote.
17739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17758 label, the box will
17762 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17763 Clicking on the box label again will close
17776 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17777 and click on the footnote
17792 \begin_layout Standard
17793 Here is an example footnote:
17801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17802 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17810 \begin_layout Standard
17811 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17812 position where the footnote box is placed.
17813 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17814 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17815 according to the document class.
17817 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17818 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17824 ey are described in the
17827 \begin_inset space ~
17835 \begin_layout Section
17837 \begin_inset Index idx
17840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17847 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17849 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17856 \begin_layout Standard
17857 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17859 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17863 \begin_inset space ~
17868 or the toolbar button
17871 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17897 appearing within your text.
17898 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17899 's representation of your margin
17908 \begin_layout Standard
17909 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17913 \begin_inset Marginal
17916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17918 This is a marginal note.
17926 \begin_layout Standard
17927 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17928 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17929 pages, right on odd pages.
17932 \begin_layout Standard
17933 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17936 \begin_inset space ~
17944 \begin_inset space ~
17952 \begin_layout Section
17953 Graphics and Images
17954 \begin_inset Index idx
17957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17964 \begin_inset Index idx
17967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17974 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17976 name "sec:Graphics"
17983 \begin_layout Standard
17984 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17985 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17988 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17993 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17997 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18000 \begin_layout Standard
18001 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18006 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18007 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18009 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18010 \begin_inset space ~
18014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18016 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18023 \begin_layout Standard
18028 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18029 of the image in the output.
18030 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18034 \begin_inset space ~
18038 \begin_inset space ~
18047 \begin_inset space ~
18051 \begin_inset space ~
18055 \begin_inset space ~
18060 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18061 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18069 \begin_layout Standard
18073 \begin_inset space ~
18077 \begin_inset space ~
18082 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18083 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18085 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18090 \begin_inset space ~
18095 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18096 with the image size is printed.
18099 \begin_layout Standard
18100 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18101 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18103 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18106 \begin_layout Standard
18108 \begin_inset Graphics
18109 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18117 \begin_layout Standard
18118 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18119 the image into a float, see section
18120 \begin_inset space ~
18124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18126 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18133 \begin_layout Subsection
18135 \begin_inset Index idx
18138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18147 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18154 \begin_layout Standard
18155 You can insert images in any known file format.
18156 But as we explained in section
18157 \begin_inset space ~
18161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18163 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18167 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18169 therefore uses the program
18173 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18174 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18175 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18176 \begin_inset space ~
18180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18182 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18189 \begin_layout Standard
18190 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18193 \begin_layout Description
18195 \begin_inset space ~
18198 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18199 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18200 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18204 Graphics Interchange Format
18205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18208 (GIF, file extension
18209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18221 \begin_inset Index idx
18224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18256 Portable Network Graphics
18257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18260 (PNG, file extension
18261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18273 \begin_inset Index idx
18276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18308 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18312 (JPG, file extension
18313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18337 \begin_inset Index idx
18340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18371 \begin_layout Description
18373 \begin_inset space ~
18376 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18378 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18379 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18380 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18381 \begin_inset Newline newline
18384 Scalable image formats can be
18385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18388 Scalable Vector Graphics
18389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18392 (SVG, file extension
18393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18405 \begin_inset Index idx
18408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18440 Encapsulated PostScript
18441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18444 (EPS, file extension
18445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18457 \begin_inset Index idx
18460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18492 Portable Document Format
18493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18496 (PDF, file extension
18497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18509 \begin_inset Index idx
18512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18527 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18528 result will not be scalable.
18529 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18535 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18543 \begin_layout Standard
18544 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18551 \begin_layout Subsection
18552 Grouping of Image Settings
18553 \begin_inset Index idx
18556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18557 Images ! Settings grouping
18565 \begin_layout Standard
18566 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18568 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18569 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18571 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18572 need to manually change each of them.
18576 \begin_layout Standard
18577 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18580 \begin_inset space ~
18584 \begin_inset space ~
18596 \begin_inset space ~
18600 \begin_inset space ~
18606 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18607 and checking the name of the desired group.
18610 \begin_layout Section
18612 \begin_inset Index idx
18615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18631 \begin_layout Standard
18632 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18635 arg "tabular-insert"
18640 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18644 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18645 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18646 from the rest of the table.
18647 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18648 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18650 Here is an example table:
18653 \begin_layout Standard
18655 \begin_inset Tabular
18656 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18657 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18658 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18659 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18660 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18661 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18861 \begin_layout Subsection
18865 \begin_layout Standard
18866 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18869 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
18873 This brings up the table dialog.
18874 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18875 cursor is placed currently.
18876 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18877 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18878 done on all of your selection.
18881 \begin_layout Standard
18882 In addition to the table dialog, the
18885 \begin_inset space ~
18890 helps you in setting table properties.
18891 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18894 \begin_layout Standard
18898 \begin_inset space ~
18903 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18904 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18905 current cell respectively.
18906 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18908 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18909 of text, see section
18910 \begin_inset space ~
18914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18916 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18923 \begin_layout Standard
18924 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18925 using the check box
18934 This will merge the cells to
18938 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18939 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18940 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18941 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18942 in the last row without the upper border:
18945 \begin_layout Standard
18947 \begin_inset Tabular
18948 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18949 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18950 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18951 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18952 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18953 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18964 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18973 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19049 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19084 \begin_layout Standard
19085 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19086 -arguments for the table.
19087 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19088 explained in the chapter
19095 \begin_inset space ~
19101 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19102 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19103 but are visible in the output.
19106 \begin_layout Standard
19107 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19115 Most DVI-viewers are
19119 able to display rotations.
19127 \begin_layout Standard
19132 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19137 adds lines for all cell borders.
19140 \begin_layout Subsection
19142 \begin_inset Index idx
19145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19146 Tables ! Longtables
19152 \begin_inset Index idx
19155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19164 \begin_layout Standard
19165 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19168 \begin_inset space ~
19172 \begin_inset space ~
19181 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19182 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19185 \begin_layout Description
19190 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19191 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19192 except for the first page, if
19195 \begin_inset space ~
19203 \begin_layout Description
19207 \begin_inset space ~
19212 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19213 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19216 \begin_layout Description
19221 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19222 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19223 except for the last page, if
19226 \begin_inset space ~
19234 \begin_layout Description
19238 \begin_inset space ~
19243 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19244 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19247 \begin_layout Description
19248 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19249 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19251 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19255 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19258 \begin_inset space ~
19266 \begin_layout Standard
19267 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19268 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19269 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19275 In this context, first means first in this order:
19278 \begin_inset space ~
19290 \begin_inset space ~
19295 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19298 \begin_layout Standard
19300 \begin_inset Tabular
19301 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19302 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19303 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19304 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19305 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19306 <row endfirsthead="true">
19307 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19313 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19318 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19327 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19337 <row endfirsthead="true">
19338 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19349 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19358 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19370 <row endhead="true">
19371 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19382 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19391 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19401 <row endhead="true">
19402 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19413 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19422 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19434 <row endfoot="true">
19435 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19446 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19455 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19486 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20427 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20436 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20445 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20456 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20487 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20518 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20549 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20580 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20611 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20642 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20673 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20704 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20735 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20766 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20797 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20828 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20859 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20890 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20921 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21138 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21169 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21200 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21231 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21262 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21324 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21355 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21386 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21416 <row endlastfoot="true">
21417 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21428 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21454 \begin_layout Subsection
21456 \begin_inset Index idx
21459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21468 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21475 \begin_layout Standard
21476 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21477 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21478 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21479 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21483 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21486 \begin_layout Standard
21487 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21488 for the column in the table dialog.
21489 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21490 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21494 \begin_layout Standard
21496 \begin_inset Tabular
21497 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21498 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21499 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21500 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21501 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21521 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21590 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21646 This is longer now.
21651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21703 This is longer now.
21708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21734 \begin_layout Standard
21735 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21736 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21741 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21742 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21748 Selection with the mouse or with
21752 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21753 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21754 the selection from outside the table.
21757 \begin_layout Section
21759 \begin_inset Index idx
21762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21778 \begin_layout Subsection
21782 \begin_layout Standard
21783 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21784 have a fixed location.
21786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21793 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21801 \begin_inset space ~
21806 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21807 too many notes on the current page.
21810 \begin_layout Standard
21811 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21812 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21813 and pages without text.
21814 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21815 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21816 Floats are therefore numbered.
21817 Referencing is described in section
21818 \begin_inset space ~
21822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21824 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21831 \begin_layout Standard
21832 To insert a float, use the menu
21834 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21838 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21839 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21841 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21842 \begin_inset Index idx
21845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21851 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21852 paragraph within the float.
21853 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21854 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21855 left-clicking on the box label.
21856 A closed float box looks like this:
21857 \begin_inset Graphics
21858 filename clipart/float.png
21863 – a gray button with a red label.
21866 \begin_layout Standard
21867 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
21869 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21872 \begin_layout Subsection
21874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21876 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21881 \begin_inset Index idx
21884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21885 Floats ! Figure floats
21893 \begin_layout Standard
21895 \begin_inset space ~
21899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21901 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21905 was created using the menu
21907 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21908 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21914 arg "float-insert figure"
21918 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21921 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21927 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21931 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21932 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21934 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21936 \begin_inset space ~
21944 arg "layout-paragraph"
21950 \begin_layout Standard
21951 \begin_inset Float figure
21956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21958 \begin_inset Graphics
21959 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21969 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21974 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21978 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21991 \begin_layout Standard
21992 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21993 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21995 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22004 ) and refer to it using the menu
22006 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22012 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22016 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22017 vague references like
22018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22025 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22026 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22036 For more about cross-references, see section
22037 \begin_inset space ~
22041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22043 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22050 \begin_layout Standard
22051 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22052 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22053 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22054 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22055 as described in section
22056 \begin_inset space ~
22060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22062 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22068 \begin_inset space ~
22072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22074 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22078 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22079 You can also set the images one below the other.
22081 \begin_inset space ~
22085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22087 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22094 reference "fig:Platypus"
22098 are the subfigures.
22101 \begin_layout Standard
22102 \begin_inset Float figure
22107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22108 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22112 \begin_inset Float figure
22117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22118 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22123 name "fig:Undefinable"
22135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22136 \begin_inset Graphics
22137 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22148 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22152 \begin_inset Float figure
22157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22158 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22163 name "fig:Platypus"
22175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22176 \begin_inset Graphics
22177 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22189 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22196 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22199 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22201 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22205 Two distorted images.
22218 \begin_layout Subsection
22220 \begin_inset Index idx
22223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22224 Floats ! Table floats
22232 \begin_layout Standard
22233 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22235 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22236 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22239 or the toolbar button
22242 arg "float-insert table"
22246 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22247 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22248 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22250 \begin_inset space ~
22254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22256 reference "tab:Table-float"
22263 \begin_layout Standard
22264 \begin_inset Float table
22269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22270 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22275 name "tab:Table-float"
22287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22289 \begin_inset Tabular
22290 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22291 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22292 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22293 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22294 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22421 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22442 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22445 \end{array}\right]$
22453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22466 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22487 \begin_layout Subsection
22489 \begin_inset Index idx
22492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22501 \begin_layout Standard
22503 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22504 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22505 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22507 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22515 \begin_inset space ~
22523 \begin_layout Section
22525 \begin_inset Index idx
22528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22537 \begin_layout Standard
22539 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22541 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22542 \begin_inset space \space{}
22549 \begin_layout Standard
22550 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22551 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22553 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22557 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22558 and its alignment within the page.
22561 \begin_layout Standard
22563 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22573 height_special "totalheight"
22578 backgroundcolor "none"
22581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22584 This is a minipage.
22585 The text is set in an italic style.
22588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22591 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22592 another formatting.
22600 \begin_layout Standard
22601 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22604 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22608 as described in section
22609 \begin_inset space ~
22613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22615 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22620 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22626 \begin_layout Standard
22627 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22637 height_special "totalheight"
22642 backgroundcolor "none"
22645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22646 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22647 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22653 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22657 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22667 height_special "totalheight"
22672 backgroundcolor "none"
22675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22676 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22677 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22685 \begin_layout Standard
22686 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22692 \begin_layout Standard
22693 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22695 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22702 \begin_inset space ~
22710 \begin_layout Chapter
22711 Mathematical Formulas
22712 \begin_inset Index idx
22715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22722 \begin_inset Index idx
22725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22754 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22756 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22763 \begin_layout Standard
22764 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22769 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22772 \begin_layout Section
22774 \begin_inset Index idx
22777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22786 \begin_layout Standard
22787 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22800 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22802 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22803 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22804 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22806 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22812 \begin_layout Standard
22813 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22817 \begin_inset space ~
22822 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22825 \begin_layout Standard
22826 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22827 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22830 \begin_layout Standard
22831 This is a line with an inline formula
22832 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22838 \begin_layout Standard
22839 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22840 paragraph, like this one:
22841 \begin_inset Formula
22848 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22851 \begin_layout Standard
22853 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22855 For example, typing
22856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22869 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22870 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22874 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22877 \begin_inset space ~
22885 \begin_layout Subsection
22886 Navigating in Formulas
22887 \begin_inset Index idx
22890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22899 \begin_layout Standard
22900 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22901 achieved with the arrow keys.
22903 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22904 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22909 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22910 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22914 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22918 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22921 \end{array}\right]$
22929 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22934 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22935 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22938 \begin_layout Standard
22943 , printed in this document as
22944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22948 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22955 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22956 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22957 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22962 For example, if you want
22963 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22971 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22981 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22985 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22990 , since in the latter case only the
22993 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22998 will be under the square root sign:
22999 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23005 \begin_layout Standard
23006 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23008 \begin_inset Formula
23010 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23019 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23020 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23023 \begin_layout Subsection
23027 \begin_layout Standard
23028 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23029 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23033 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23034 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23035 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23036 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23037 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23041 \begin_layout Subsection
23042 Exponents and Subscripts
23043 \begin_inset Index idx
23046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23053 \begin_inset Index idx
23056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23065 \begin_layout Standard
23066 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23069 arg "math-superscript"
23075 arg "math-subscript"
23078 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23080 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23083 , type in a formula
23086 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23096 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23102 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23106 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23112 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23118 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23127 , you have to use an extra
23131 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23132 For example, if you want
23133 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23139 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23145 Subscripts are similar: To get
23146 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23152 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23160 \begin_layout Subsection
23162 \begin_inset Index idx
23165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23174 \begin_layout Standard
23175 Create a fraction either with the command
23181 or by using the icon
23184 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23190 \begin_inset space ~
23196 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23197 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23198 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23203 To move back up, press
23208 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23209 \begin_inset Formula
23211 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23214 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23222 \begin_layout Subsection
23224 \begin_inset Index idx
23227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23236 \begin_layout Standard
23237 Roots can be created using the
23240 \begin_inset space ~
23248 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23254 arg "math-insert \\root"
23276 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23282 always produces a square root.
23285 \begin_layout Subsection
23286 Operators with Limits
23287 \begin_inset Index idx
23290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23297 \begin_inset Index idx
23300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23307 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23309 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23316 \begin_layout Standard
23318 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23322 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23325 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23326 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23327 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23328 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23329 The sum operator will automatically place its
23330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23337 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23339 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23343 \begin_inset Formula
23345 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23350 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23354 \begin_layout Standard
23355 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23357 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23358 behind the operator and using the menu
23360 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23361 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23363 \begin_inset space ~
23367 \begin_inset space ~
23381 \begin_layout Standard
23382 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23391 \begin_inset Index idx
23394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23401 \begin_inset Formula
23403 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23408 which will place the
23409 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23421 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23422 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23428 \begin_layout Standard
23429 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23436 Have a look at section
23437 \begin_inset space ~
23441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23443 reference "subsec:Functions"
23447 for an explanation of function macros.
23450 \begin_layout Subsection
23452 \begin_inset Index idx
23455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23464 \begin_layout Standard
23465 Most math symbols can be found in the
23468 \begin_inset space ~
23473 under one of several categories; including
23490 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23494 \begin_layout Standard
23495 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23496 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23497 don't have to use the
23500 \begin_inset space ~
23505 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23507 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23510 \begin_layout Subsection
23512 \begin_inset Index idx
23515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23524 \begin_layout Standard
23525 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23531 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23537 \begin_inset space ~
23545 arg "math-insert \\space"
23549 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23550 For example, the sequence
23555 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23558 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23560 \begin_inset Graphics
23561 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23566 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23567 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23568 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23569 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23570 , because they are negative
23572 Here are two examples:
23575 \begin_layout Standard
23585 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23591 \begin_layout Standard
23601 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23607 \begin_layout Subsection
23609 \begin_inset Index idx
23612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23621 name "subsec:Functions"
23628 \begin_layout Standard
23632 \begin_inset space ~
23637 contains under the button
23640 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23643 a number of function macros, such as
23644 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23648 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23656 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23663 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23664 avoid confusions, because
23665 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23669 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23675 \begin_layout Standard
23676 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23678 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23682 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23688 \begin_layout Standard
23689 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23690 are placed, as described in section
23691 \begin_inset space ~
23695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23697 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23704 \begin_layout Subsection
23706 \begin_inset Index idx
23709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23718 \begin_layout Standard
23719 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23721 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23722 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23723 commands, for example, to enter
23724 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23727 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23728 Our example is entered by typing
23733 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23740 \begin_inset space ~
23744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23746 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23750 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23753 \begin_layout Standard
23754 \begin_inset Float table
23759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23760 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23765 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23769 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23779 \begin_inset Tabular
23780 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23781 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23782 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23783 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23784 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23868 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23922 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23976 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24030 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24084 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24138 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24192 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24246 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24300 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24345 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24366 \begin_layout Standard
24367 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24370 \begin_inset space ~
24378 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24381 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24385 \begin_layout Section
24386 Brackets and Delimiters
24387 \begin_inset Index idx
24390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24397 \begin_inset Index idx
24400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24409 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24416 \begin_layout Standard
24417 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24419 For some purposes, using just the keys
24424 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24425 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24426 toolbar delimiter icon
24429 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24433 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24434 \begin_inset Formula
24436 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24444 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24445 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24449 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24452 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24458 \begin_inset Formula
24460 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24468 \begin_layout Standard
24469 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24470 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24474 \begin_layout Standard
24475 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24476 left side and right side.
24477 If you use the option
24480 \begin_inset space ~
24485 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24486 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24488 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24493 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24494 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24497 \begin_layout Standard
24498 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24499 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24500 is to go inside the brackets.
24501 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24506 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24507 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24508 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24512 arg "math-delim ( )"
24518 \begin_layout Section
24519 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24520 \begin_inset Index idx
24523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24530 \begin_inset Index idx
24533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24540 \begin_inset Index idx
24543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24544 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24552 \begin_layout Standard
24553 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24557 \begin_inset space ~
24565 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24569 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24570 Here is an example:
24571 \begin_inset Formula
24573 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24582 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24583 \begin_inset space ~
24587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24589 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24594 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24595 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24596 This alignment is set in the box
24601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24650 for every column as default.
24651 For example, the sequence
24652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24663 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24664 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24665 corresponds to the relevant column.
24666 The result will look like this:
24667 \begin_inset Formula
24670 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24671 column & has & has\,right\\
24672 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24681 \begin_layout Standard
24682 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24685 arg "newline-insert newline"
24688 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24689 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24691 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24694 or the math toolbar.
24697 \begin_layout Standard
24698 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24699 It can be created with the menu
24701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24702 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24704 \begin_inset space ~
24716 Here is an example:
24717 \begin_inset Formula
24731 \begin_layout Standard
24732 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24735 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24738 arg "newline-insert newline"
24742 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24747 arg "newline-insert newline"
24750 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24758 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24759 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24760 A new row is created by every further entry of
24763 arg "newline-insert newline"
24767 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24768 Here is an example:
24769 \begin_inset Formula
24771 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24772 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24777 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24778 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24779 \begin_inset Formula
24781 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24789 \begin_layout Standard
24790 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24797 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24798 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24801 reference "eq:asquared"
24806 The other types are described in section
24807 \begin_inset space ~
24811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24813 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24820 \begin_layout Section
24821 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24822 \begin_inset Index idx
24825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24826 Math ! Formula numbering
24832 \begin_inset Index idx
24835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24836 Math ! Referencing formulas
24842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24844 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24851 \begin_layout Standard
24852 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24854 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24855 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24857 \begin_inset space ~
24861 \begin_inset space ~
24869 arg "math-number-toggle"
24873 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24874 within parentheses.
24875 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24876 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24877 the document class.
24878 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24879 separated by a dot:
24880 \begin_inset Formula
24890 arg "math-number-toggle"
24893 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24894 You can only number displayed formulas.
24897 \begin_layout Standard
24898 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24900 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24901 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24903 \begin_inset space ~
24907 \begin_inset space ~
24915 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24918 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24919 \begin_inset Formula
24922 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24928 To number all lines use the shortcut
24931 arg "math-number-toggle"
24937 \begin_layout Standard
24938 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24941 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24942 A label is inserted with the menu
24944 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24953 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24954 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24955 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24967 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24968 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24969 We inserted in the following example the label
24970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24977 in the second line:
24978 \begin_inset Formula
24980 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24981 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24986 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24987 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24988 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24990 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24992 \begin_inset space ~
25000 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25004 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25005 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25006 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25007 as the formula number:
25010 \begin_layout Standard
25011 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25014 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25021 \begin_layout Standard
25022 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25023 's cross-reference box are described in section
25024 \begin_inset space ~
25028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25030 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25035 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25043 \begin_layout Section
25044 User defined math macros
25045 \begin_inset Index idx
25048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25057 \begin_layout Standard
25059 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25060 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25061 Math macros are explained in section
25064 \begin_inset space ~
25076 \begin_layout Section
25080 \begin_layout Subsection
25082 \begin_inset Index idx
25085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25094 \begin_layout Standard
25095 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25096 To set a font in a formula, use the
25099 \begin_inset space ~
25107 arg "math-insert \\font"
25110 , or enter its command, listed in table
25111 \begin_inset space ~
25115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25117 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25124 \begin_layout Standard
25125 \begin_inset Float table
25130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25131 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25136 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25140 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25150 \begin_inset Tabular
25151 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25152 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25153 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25154 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25186 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25213 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25240 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25273 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25300 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25327 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25361 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25388 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25422 \begin_layout Standard
25423 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25431 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25447 \begin_layout Standard
25448 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25449 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25454 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25455 space when you need a space in the box.
25456 Here is an example where
25457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25468 denotes the set of numbers:
25469 \begin_inset Formula
25471 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25479 \begin_layout Standard
25480 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25481 You can, for example, put a character in
25490 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25494 \begin_inset Newline newline
25497 So it is better not to use this feature.
25500 \begin_layout Standard
25501 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25502 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25506 \begin_inset Newline newline
25509 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25515 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25516 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25522 \begin_layout Standard
25529 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25532 \begin_layout Standard
25533 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25535 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25536 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25538 \begin_inset space ~
25546 \begin_layout Subsection
25548 \begin_inset Index idx
25551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25560 \begin_layout Standard
25561 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25563 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25567 \begin_inset space ~
25571 \begin_inset space ~
25579 \begin_inset space ~
25587 arg "math-insert \\font"
25591 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25592 in black instead of blue.
25593 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25594 Here is an example:
25595 \begin_inset Formula
25598 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25599 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25608 \begin_layout Subsection
25610 \begin_inset Index idx
25613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25622 \begin_layout Standard
25623 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25624 automatically chosen in most situations.
25642 For most characters,
25650 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25651 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25656 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25657 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25658 thinks are appropriate.
25659 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25662 arg "math-insert \\style"
25666 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25667 For example, you can set
25668 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25671 , which is normally in
25680 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25684 The four styles are used in the following example:
25687 \begin_layout Standard
25688 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25692 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25696 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25700 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25706 \begin_layout Standard
25707 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25708 is set in a particular size with the menu
25710 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25712 \begin_inset space ~
25717 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25718 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25719 will be adjusted to correspond.
25720 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25731 \begin_layout Standard
25735 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25741 \begin_layout Section
25742 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25744 \begin_inset Index idx
25747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25754 \begin_inset Index idx
25757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25766 \begin_layout Standard
25768 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25769 that are in common use.
25772 \begin_layout Subsection
25773 Enabling AMS-Support
25776 \begin_layout Standard
25777 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25778 the document by selecting the checkbox
25781 \begin_inset space ~
25785 \begin_inset space ~
25789 \begin_inset space ~
25796 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25800 \begin_inset Index idx
25803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25804 Document ! Settings
25812 \begin_inset space ~
25818 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25819 -errors in formulas,
25820 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25823 \begin_layout Subsection
25825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25827 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25832 \begin_inset Index idx
25835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25836 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25844 \begin_layout Standard
25845 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25846 provides a selection of different formula types.
25848 allows you to choose between
25869 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25870 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25876 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25879 \begin_layout Chapter
25883 \begin_layout Section
25885 \begin_inset Index idx
25888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25897 name "sec:Cross-References"
25904 \begin_layout Standard
25905 One of \SpecialChar LyX
25906 's strengths is cross-references.
25907 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25909 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25910 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25911 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25914 \begin_layout Enumerate
25918 \begin_layout Enumerate
25919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25921 name "enu:Second-item"
25928 \begin_layout Enumerate
25932 \begin_layout Standard
25933 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25935 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25938 or by pressing the toolbar button
25945 A gray label box like this:
25946 \begin_inset Graphics
25947 filename clipart/label.png
25952 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25954 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25989 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25990 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26006 \begin_layout Standard
26007 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26009 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26012 or the toolbar button
26015 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26019 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26020 \begin_inset Graphics
26021 filename clipart/reference.png
26026 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26028 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26041 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26045 \begin_layout Standard
26046 As an alternative to
26048 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26051 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26056 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26057 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26059 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26071 \begin_layout Standard
26072 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26073 \begin_inset space ~
26077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26079 reference "enu:Second-item"
26086 \begin_layout Standard
26087 It is recommended to use a protected space
26091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26092 described in section
26093 \begin_inset space ~
26097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26099 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26108 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26109 line breaks between them.
26112 \begin_layout Standard
26113 There are six formats of cross-references:
26116 \begin_layout Description
26117 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26120 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26127 \begin_layout Description
26128 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26129 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26141 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26148 \begin_layout Description
26149 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26150 \begin_inset space ~
26154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26155 LatexCommand pageref
26156 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26163 \begin_layout Description
26165 \begin_inset space ~
26169 \begin_inset space ~
26172 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26174 LatexCommand vpageref
26175 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26180 \begin_inset Newline newline
26183 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26184 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26185 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26186 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26187 it prints “on the next page”.
26188 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26191 \begin_layout Description
26193 \begin_inset space ~
26197 \begin_inset space ~
26201 \begin_inset space ~
26204 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26207 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26212 \begin_inset Newline newline
26215 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26221 ; otherwise it behaves like
26225 \begin_inset space ~
26229 \begin_inset space ~
26238 \begin_layout Description
26240 \begin_inset space ~
26243 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26244 \begin_inset Newline newline
26248 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26256 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26266 \begin_inset Index idx
26269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26271 -packages ! prettyref
26277 \begin_inset Index idx
26280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26282 -packages ! refstyle
26293 \begin_inset Newline newline
26296 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26297 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26300 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26304 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26305 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26313 is the default and preferred because
26317 supports only English documents.
26318 The format is specified by using the command
26330 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26331 preamble of the document.
26332 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26345 ) can be done with this command
26346 \begin_inset Newline newline
26353 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26358 \begin_inset Newline newline
26361 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26363 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26365 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26372 \begin_layout Description
26374 \begin_inset space ~
26377 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26379 LatexCommand nameref
26380 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26387 \begin_layout Standard
26388 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26389 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26391 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26395 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26399 \begin_layout Standard
26400 You can only use the style
26404 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26408 is always possible.
26411 \begin_layout Standard
26412 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26413 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26415 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26416 \begin_inset space ~
26420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26422 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26429 \begin_layout Standard
26430 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26434 \begin_inset space ~
26438 \begin_inset space ~
26443 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26444 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26447 \begin_inset space ~
26452 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26453 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26456 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26462 \begin_layout Standard
26463 You can change labels at any time.
26464 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26465 do not need to think about this.
26468 \begin_layout Standard
26469 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26471 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26475 \begin_layout Standard
26476 References are described in detail in the section
26477 \begin_inset space ~
26481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26491 \begin_inset space ~
26499 \begin_layout Section
26500 Table of Contents and other Listings
26501 \begin_inset Index idx
26504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26511 \begin_inset Index idx
26514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26530 \begin_layout Subsection
26532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26534 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26541 \begin_layout Standard
26542 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26544 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26545 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26547 \begin_inset space ~
26551 \begin_inset space ~
26557 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26559 If you click on it, the
26563 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26564 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26565 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26567 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26569 \begin_inset space ~
26574 that is described in section
26575 \begin_inset space ~
26579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26581 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26588 \begin_layout Standard
26589 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26590 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26592 \begin_inset space ~
26596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26598 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26602 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26604 \begin_inset space ~
26608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26610 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26614 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26616 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26619 \begin_layout Subsection
26620 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26621 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26623 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26630 \begin_layout Standard
26631 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26633 You can insert them via the
26635 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26639 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26642 \begin_layout Section
26643 URLs and Hyperlinks
26644 \begin_inset Index idx
26647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26654 \begin_inset Index idx
26657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26666 \begin_layout Subsection
26668 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26677 \begin_layout Standard
26678 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26680 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26686 \begin_layout Standard
26687 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26689 \begin_inset Flex URL
26692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26702 \begin_layout Standard
26703 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26709 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26713 \begin_layout Standard
26714 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26722 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26731 \begin_layout Subsection
26733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26735 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26742 \begin_layout Standard
26743 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26745 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26748 or with the toolbar button
26755 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26764 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26765 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26766 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26768 name "LyX's homepage"
26769 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26773 , an Email address like this:
26774 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26776 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26777 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26782 , or a link to a file.
26785 \begin_layout Standard
26786 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26799 to the link target.
26802 \begin_layout Standard
26803 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26804 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26805 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26806 the text style dialog.
26807 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26811 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26813 name "LyX's homepage"
26814 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26821 \begin_layout Standard
26822 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26826 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26828 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26829 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26833 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26835 \begin_inset Newline newline
26843 \begin_inset Newline newline
26850 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26853 \begin_layout Section
26855 \begin_inset Index idx
26858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26865 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26867 name "sec:Appendices"
26874 \begin_layout Standard
26875 Appendices are created with the menu
26877 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26879 \begin_inset space ~
26883 \begin_inset space ~
26889 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26890 as the appendix part of the book.
26891 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26894 \begin_layout Standard
26895 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26896 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26897 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26898 and the subsection number.
26899 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26903 \begin_layout Standard
26905 \begin_inset space ~
26909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26911 reference "chap:Credits"
26916 \begin_inset space ~
26920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26922 reference "subsec:Export"
26929 \begin_layout Section
26931 \begin_inset Index idx
26934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26941 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26943 name "sec:Bibliography"
26950 \begin_layout Standard
26951 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26953 You can include a bibliography database,
26957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26958 Known under the name
26959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26962 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26972 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26973 manually, using the paragraph environment
26977 , which was described in section
26978 \begin_inset space ~
26982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26984 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
26989 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26990 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26994 use a bibliography database.
26997 \begin_layout Subsection
26998 The Bibliography Environment
27001 \begin_layout Standard
27006 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27008 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27017 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27019 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27029 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27032 \begin_layout Standard
27033 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27035 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27038 or the toolbar button
27041 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27045 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27046 containing the available citations.
27047 Select one or more keys from the list and
27057 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27058 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27062 \begin_layout Standard
27063 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27064 entry with surrounding brackets.
27069 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27070 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27082 \begin_layout Standard
27086 Companion Second Edition
27089 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27091 key "latexcompanion"
27098 \begin_layout Standard
27099 The \SpecialChar LyX
27100 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27101 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27110 \begin_layout Standard
27111 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27114 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27116 \begin_inset space ~
27124 arg "layout-paragraph"
27128 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27131 \begin_layout Subsection
27132 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27134 \begin_inset Index idx
27137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27138 Bibliography ! Databases
27144 \begin_inset Index idx
27147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27148 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27157 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27164 \begin_layout Standard
27165 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27171 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27173 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27174 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27179 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27181 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27182 your working field in a database.
27183 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27184 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27185 list for that document.
27186 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27190 \begin_layout Standard
27191 The database is a text file with the file extension
27192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27203 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27204 The format is explained in
27205 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27211 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27213 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27215 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27220 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27221 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27222 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27224 \begin_inset Flex URL
27227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27229 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27237 \begin_layout Standard
27238 To use a database, use the menu
27240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27245 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27247 \begin_inset space ~
27253 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27254 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27261 Add bibliography to TOC
27263 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27268 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27269 in the document or just the cited references.
27272 \begin_layout Standard
27273 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27285 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27286 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27287 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27288 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27290 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27296 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27297 \begin_inset Newline newline
27301 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27303 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27315 \begin_layout Standard
27316 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27319 \begin_layout Standard
27320 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27321 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27323 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27330 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27331 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27336 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27337 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27338 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27342 The following variants are possible:
27345 \begin_layout Description
27346 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27347 with other bibliography packages (e.
27348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27352 \begin_inset space \space{}
27359 ), only with the package
27363 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27367 \begin_layout Description
27368 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27369 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27370 with all bibliography packages, except
27375 \begin_layout Description
27376 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27381 , works with all bibliography packages
27384 \begin_layout Standard
27385 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27386 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27388 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27391 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27395 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27404 \begin_layout Standard
27405 When you select the option
27407 Sectioned bibliography
27411 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27412 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27415 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27416 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27418 Customizing Bibliographies
27422 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27427 Additional Features
27432 \begin_layout Standard
27433 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27434 the two methods of creating them.
27435 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27436 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27437 We used the style file
27441 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27444 \begin_layout Subsection
27446 \begin_inset Index idx
27449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27450 Bibliography ! Citation format
27458 \begin_layout Standard
27459 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27460 For this feature you need to enable the option
27466 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27470 \begin_inset Index idx
27473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27474 Document ! Settings
27484 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27485 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27486 style files as explained in
27487 the previous section.
27490 \begin_layout Standard
27491 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27492 the citation reference window.
27493 Here is an example where the text
27494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27498 \begin_inset space ~
27502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27505 appears after the reference:
27508 \begin_layout Standard
27510 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27513 key "latexcompanion"
27520 \begin_layout Section
27522 \begin_inset Index idx
27525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27541 \begin_layout Standard
27542 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27544 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27546 \begin_inset space ~
27551 or the toolbar button
27558 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27559 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27560 by \SpecialChar LyX
27561 as the index entry.
27564 \begin_layout Standard
27565 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27567 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27568 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27570 \begin_inset space ~
27576 A light blue box labeled
27577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27588 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27589 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27593 \begin_layout Standard
27594 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27595 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27596 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27597 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27599 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27601 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27608 \begin_layout Subsection
27609 Grouping Index Entries
27610 \begin_inset Index idx
27613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27622 \begin_layout Standard
27623 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27625 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27626 lists under the entry
27627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27635 First we create the entry
27636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27644 \begin_inset space ~
27648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27650 reference "subsec:Lists"
27655 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27656 \begin_inset space ~
27660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27662 reference "sec:Itemize"
27666 , we insert the command
27669 \begin_layout Standard
27675 \begin_layout Standard
27679 \begin_layout Standard
27685 \begin_layout Standard
27686 for the enumerated list in section
27687 \begin_inset space ~
27691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27693 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27700 \begin_layout Standard
27701 The exclamation mark
27702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27709 marks the grouping levels.
27710 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27711 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27712 If we don't have an index entry for
27713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27720 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27723 \begin_layout Subsection
27725 \begin_inset Index idx
27728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27729 Index ! Page ranges
27737 \begin_layout Standard
27738 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27740 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27741 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27742 an index entry in section
27743 \begin_inset space ~
27747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27749 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27756 \begin_layout Standard
27759 Paragraph environments|(
27762 \begin_layout Standard
27763 and another entry at the end of section
27764 \begin_inset space ~
27768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27770 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27777 \begin_layout Standard
27780 Paragraph environments|)
27783 \begin_layout Standard
27785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27808 respectively start and end the index range.
27809 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27810 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27811 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27812 An example is the index entry
27813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27816 Document ! Settings
27817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27823 \begin_layout Subsection
27825 \begin_inset Index idx
27828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27829 Index ! Cross referencing
27837 \begin_layout Standard
27838 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27839 We referred for example in the index entry
27840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27848 \begin_inset space ~
27852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27854 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
27858 ) to the index entry
27859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27866 in the same section using the entry
27869 \begin_layout Standard
27872 GIF|see{Image formats}
27875 \begin_layout Standard
27876 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
27878 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27879 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27882 \begin_layout Subsection
27884 \begin_inset Index idx
27887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27888 Index ! Entry order
27896 \begin_layout Standard
27897 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27898 follow the rules for the index order.
27899 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
27904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27905 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27907 \begin_inset space ~
27911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27913 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27922 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27923 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27948 \begin_inset Index idx
27951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27952 Dummy entries ! maïs
27958 \begin_inset Index idx
27961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27962 Dummy entries ! maître
27968 \begin_inset Index idx
27971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27972 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27977 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27978 maïs, maison, maître.
27979 To achieve this, we use the command
27982 \begin_layout Standard
27985 previous entry@current entry
27988 \begin_layout Standard
27989 In our case we want to have
27990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28005 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28008 \begin_layout Standard
28014 \begin_layout Standard
28015 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28016 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28018 See the next subsection for an example.
28021 \begin_layout Standard
28022 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28028 \begin_layout Standard
28029 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28034 to generate the index (see sec.
28035 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28041 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28050 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28051 -package aeguill in sec.
28052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28058 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28062 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28063 -packages although all these index
28064 commands start with
28065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28078 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28083 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28086 \begin_layout Standard
28098 \begin_layout Standard
28110 \begin_layout Subsection
28112 \begin_inset Index idx
28115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28116 Index ! Entry layout
28124 \begin_layout Standard
28125 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28126 \begin_inset Index idx
28129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28132 This is an italic dummy entry
28137 You can also format the page number using the character
28138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28145 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28146 -command without a backslash.
28147 We can write for example
28150 \begin_layout Standard
28153 italic page number:|textit
28156 \begin_layout Standard
28157 to get the page number in italic.
28158 \begin_inset Index idx
28161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28162 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28167 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28168 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28186 \begin_inset space ~
28192 Have a look at section
28193 \begin_inset space ~
28197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28199 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28203 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28207 \begin_layout Standard
28208 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28216 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28220 to generate the index, see sec.
28221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28227 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28236 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28241 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28242 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28245 key "latexcompanion"
28257 \begin_layout Standard
28258 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28260 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28261 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28262 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28263 If so, put the following in the preamble
28266 \begin_layout Standard
28278 \begin_layout Standard
28282 \begin_layout Standard
28288 \begin_layout Standard
28289 in the index entry.
28290 \begin_inset Index idx
28293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28294 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28299 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28300 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28301 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28304 \begin_layout Standard
28305 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28306 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28307 a bold font for all index entries.
28308 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28320 documentation for details,
28321 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28323 key "makeindex,xindy"
28330 \begin_layout Subsection
28332 \begin_inset Index idx
28335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28344 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28351 \begin_layout Standard
28352 If the index generation program
28356 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28357 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28361 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28362 distribution, is used.
28366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28371 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28372 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28373 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28374 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28375 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28385 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28387 dialog, see section
28388 \begin_inset space ~
28392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28394 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28399 The available options are listed and explained in
28400 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28402 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28407 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28411 \begin_layout Standard
28412 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28413 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28416 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28417 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28421 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28422 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28425 \begin_layout Subsection
28429 \begin_layout Standard
28430 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28431 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28439 next to the standard index.
28441 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28442 that add this feature.
28449 \begin_inset Index idx
28452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28454 -packages ! splitidx
28459 package to generate multiple indexes.
28460 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28466 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28468 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28475 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28476 style, but it also includes
28477 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28478 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28486 \begin_layout Standard
28487 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28488 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28490 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28491 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28494 and select the option
28496 Use multiple Indexes
28503 already contains the standard index
28504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28512 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28513 also appear as a heading) to the
28517 input field and press the
28522 The new index now also appears in the list.
28523 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28524 label color to the new index.
28527 \begin_layout Standard
28528 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28531 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28538 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28539 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28540 are additional features:
28543 \begin_layout Itemize
28544 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28545 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28548 \begin_layout Itemize
28549 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28550 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28558 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28559 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28560 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28561 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28564 \begin_layout Section
28565 Nomenclature/Glossary
28566 \begin_inset Index idx
28569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28576 \begin_inset Index idx
28579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28610 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28617 \begin_layout Standard
28618 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28619 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28620 called nomenclature or glossary.
28623 \begin_layout Standard
28624 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28631 \begin_inset Index idx
28634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28636 -packages ! nomencl
28642 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28644 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28650 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28654 \begin_layout Standard
28655 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28656 and then use the menu
28658 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28664 \begin_inset space ~
28669 or the toolbar button
28672 arg "nomencl-insert"
28677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28688 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28691 \begin_layout Standard
28692 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28693 The first is the term or
28697 that you wish to define.
28702 of the term or symbol.
28705 \begin_layout Standard
28706 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28714 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28715 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28723 \begin_layout Subsection
28724 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28725 \begin_inset Index idx
28728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28729 Nomenclature ! Layout
28737 \begin_layout Standard
28738 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28742 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28749 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28757 \begin_inset Newline newline
28765 \begin_inset Newline newline
28771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28778 character starts/ends the formula.
28779 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28780 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28792 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28802 \begin_layout Standard
28803 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28804 -syntax is given in section
28805 \begin_inset space ~
28809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28811 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28818 \begin_layout Standard
28822 \begin_inset space ~
28827 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28829 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28834 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28841 in this document is:
28842 \begin_inset Newline newline
28847 dummy entry for the character
28852 \begin_inset Newline newline
28864 \begin_inset space ~
28874 font use the command
28903 \begin_layout Standard
28904 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
28905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28909 \begin_inset space \space{}
28913 \begin_inset Newline newline
28929 \begin_inset Newline newline
28932 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
28933 This command will make the font of all symbols
28940 \begin_inset space ~
28948 \begin_layout Standard
28949 If the characters |
28950 \begin_inset space \space{}
28954 \begin_inset space \space{}
28958 \begin_inset space \space{}
28962 \begin_inset space \space{}
28966 \begin_inset space \space{}
28969 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28970 a quote character in front of them.
28971 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28972 LatexCommand nomenclature
28973 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28974 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28981 \begin_layout Subsection
28982 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28983 \begin_inset Index idx
28986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28987 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28995 \begin_layout Standard
28996 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28997 -code of the symbol
28999 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29001 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29004 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29005 LatexCommand nomenclature
29007 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29014 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29018 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29019 LatexCommand nomenclature
29022 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29027 They will be sorted by
29028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29054 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29057 will be sorted before the
29061 since the character
29062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29069 is considered in sorting.
29072 \begin_layout Standard
29073 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29076 \begin_inset space ~
29081 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29082 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29084 For the example given, you can insert
29088 in this field for the
29089 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29096 will be located before
29097 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29103 \begin_layout Standard
29104 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29109 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29118 \begin_layout Subsection
29119 Nomenclature Options
29120 \begin_inset Index idx
29123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29124 Nomenclature ! Options
29132 \begin_layout Standard
29137 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29138 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29141 \begin_layout Description
29142 refeq Appends the phrase
29143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29158 to every nomenclature entry, where
29164 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29167 \begin_layout Description
29168 refpage Appends the phrase
29169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29184 to every nomenclature entry, where
29190 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29193 \begin_layout Description
29194 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29197 \begin_layout Standard
29198 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29199 class options list in the
29201 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29205 In this document the options
29212 \begin_layout Standard
29213 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29219 \begin_layout Standard
29220 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29221 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29226 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29229 \begin_layout Description
29239 \begin_layout Description
29242 nomrefpage Like the
29249 \begin_layout Description
29252 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29261 \begin_layout Description
29265 \begin_inset space ~
29271 \begin_inset space ~
29276 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29279 \begin_layout Standard
29281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29288 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29289 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29293 \begin_layout Standard
29301 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29304 \begin_inset Newline newline
29311 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29316 \begin_inset Newline newline
29320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29335 by their translation.
29338 \begin_layout Subsection
29339 Printing the Nomenclature
29340 \begin_inset Index idx
29343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29344 Nomenclature ! Printing
29352 \begin_layout Standard
29353 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29355 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29356 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29372 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29373 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29374 You can choose between these settings:
29377 \begin_layout Description
29378 Default a space of 1
29379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29385 \begin_layout Description
29387 \begin_inset space ~
29391 \begin_inset space ~
29394 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29397 \begin_layout Description
29398 Custom custom space
29401 \begin_layout Standard
29402 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29411 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29419 For example, in order to change the name to
29423 , add the following line to the preamble:
29426 \begin_layout Standard
29434 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29437 \begin_layout Subsection
29438 Nomenclature Program
29439 \begin_inset Index idx
29442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29443 Nomenclature ! Program
29449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29451 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29458 \begin_layout Standard
29464 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29465 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29467 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29472 by adding options, see section
29473 \begin_inset space ~
29477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29479 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29484 The available options are listed and explained in
29485 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29487 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29494 \begin_layout Section
29496 \begin_inset Index idx
29499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29506 \begin_inset Index idx
29509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29510 Document ! Branches
29516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29518 name "sec:Branches"
29525 \begin_layout Standard
29526 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29527 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29528 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29529 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29532 \begin_layout Standard
29533 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29534 allows you to put text into branches.
29535 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29536 To create a branch, either select the menu
29538 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29539 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29542 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29544 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29551 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29552 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29553 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29554 and whether the name of the branch should
29555 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29556 (see below for an example).
29557 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29558 to the name of the other) and to add
29559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29567 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29571 \begin_inset space ~
29574 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29575 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29578 \begin_layout Standard
29579 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29580 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29582 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29585 where you can choose a branch.
29586 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29590 \begin_layout Standard
29591 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29592 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29595 \begin_layout Standard
29596 \begin_inset Branch Question
29599 \begin_layout Standard
29600 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29608 \begin_layout Standard
29609 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29612 \begin_layout Standard
29613 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29621 \begin_layout Standard
29628 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29629 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29632 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29633 Consider for example a file
29634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29641 which has the above branches.
29643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29650 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29674 branch were inactive,
29675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29690 branch was active, likewise
29691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29706 branch was active, and
29707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29710 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29714 if both branches were active.
29715 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29718 \begin_layout Standard
29719 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29725 \begin_layout Standard
29726 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29727 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29728 definitions for each branch.
29729 For example you can define for the question branch
29733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29734 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29735 -syntax, see section
29736 \begin_inset space ~
29740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29742 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29754 \begin_layout Standard
29764 \begin_layout Standard
29774 \begin_layout Standard
29775 and for the answer branch
29778 \begin_layout Standard
29788 \begin_layout Standard
29798 \begin_layout Standard
29799 \begin_inset Branch Question
29802 \begin_layout Standard
29806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29834 \begin_layout Standard
29835 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29838 \begin_layout Standard
29842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29870 \begin_layout Standard
29871 Now it is possible to use the
29875 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29882 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29885 commands to obtain conditional output.
29886 Here is an example formula where only the
29893 \begin_inset Formula
29895 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29903 \begin_layout Standard
29904 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29912 \begin_layout Standard
29913 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29919 \begin_inset space \space{}
29922 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29924 For this advanced usage, see the
29929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29932 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29939 \begin_layout Section
29941 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29943 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29948 \begin_inset Index idx
29951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29960 \begin_layout Standard
29963 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29964 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29967 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29969 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29975 \begin_inset Index idx
29978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29980 -packages ! hyperref
29985 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29986 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29987 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29988 part of the document.
29992 \begin_layout Standard
29993 The header information in the dialog tab
29997 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29998 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29999 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30000 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30004 \begin_inset space ~
30008 \begin_inset space ~
30013 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30014 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30015 and author entries.
30019 \begin_inset space ~
30023 \begin_inset space ~
30027 \begin_inset space ~
30032 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30035 \begin_layout Standard
30036 You can specify in the dialog tab
30040 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30045 \begin_inset space ~
30049 \begin_inset space ~
30053 \begin_inset space ~
30058 option allows long links to be split;
30061 \begin_inset space ~
30065 \begin_inset space ~
30069 \begin_inset space ~
30077 \begin_inset space ~
30082 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30085 \begin_inset space ~
30090 colors the different links.
30091 The default colors are:
30094 \begin_layout Labeling
30095 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30100 for hyperlinks and URLs
30103 \begin_layout Labeling
30104 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30112 \begin_layout Labeling
30113 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30121 \begin_layout Standard
30122 but you can change these in the field
30127 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30130 \begin_layout Standard
30133 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30136 \begin_layout Standard
30141 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30142 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30143 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30146 \begin_layout Standard
30151 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30152 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30153 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30163 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30164 when opening the PDF.
30166 \begin_inset space ~
30169 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30170 \begin_inset space ~
30173 1 will only display the sections.
30176 \begin_layout Standard
30177 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30178 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30184 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30185 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30194 \begin_layout Section
30196 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30198 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30200 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30207 \begin_layout Subsection
30210 \begin_inset Index idx
30213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30223 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30230 \begin_layout Standard
30231 As \SpecialChar LyX
30232 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30233 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30234 commands and constructs,
30237 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30238 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30239 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30240 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30241 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30242 cannot support all packages and
30246 \begin_layout Standard
30247 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30248 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30249 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30253 Code box is created by the menu
30255 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30257 \begin_inset space ~
30262 or by the toolbar button
30275 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30283 \begin_layout Standard
30284 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30286 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30288 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30289 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30296 , you can write the command part
30302 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30303 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30307 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30308 Code box behind the word.
30309 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30310 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30314 \begin_layout Standard
30315 \begin_inset Graphics
30316 filename clipart/ERT.png
30324 \begin_layout Standard
30328 \begin_layout Standard
30329 This is a line with a
30333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30356 \begin_layout Standard
30357 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30365 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30366 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30367 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30368 know that the command is finished.
30376 \begin_layout Subsection
30377 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30379 \begin_inset Argument 1
30382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30383 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30390 \begin_inset Index idx
30393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30403 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30410 \begin_layout Standard
30411 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30412 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30413 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30414 uses in the background.
30415 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30416 is based on commands, you can
30417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30425 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30426 any time if you know the right commands.
30427 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30428 is the end of the day.
30429 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30430 all caption labels bold.
30431 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30433 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30437 \begin_layout Standard
30438 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30440 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30442 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30445 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30454 \begin_layout Standard
30455 As result you find that the package
30460 \begin_inset Index idx
30463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30465 -packages ! caption
30471 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30473 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30476 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30480 \begin_inset space ~
30488 \begin_layout Standard
30493 usepackage[options]{package name}
30496 \begin_layout Standard
30497 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30498 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30499 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30500 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30503 \begin_layout Standard
30504 In your case the package name is
30509 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30514 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30515 So you add the command
30518 \begin_layout Standard
30523 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30526 \begin_layout Standard
30527 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30532 For more commands provided by the
30536 package, have a look at its documentation,
30537 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30551 \begin_layout Standard
30552 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30554 For example if you use a
30558 class, you don't need the package
30562 , you can instead write
30565 \begin_layout Standard
30570 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30575 \begin_layout Standard
30576 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30577 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30578 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30585 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30588 \begin_layout Standard
30589 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30590 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30592 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30593 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30594 Code box as described in the previous
30598 \begin_layout Standard
30599 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30600 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30603 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30605 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30612 \begin_layout Standard
30613 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30619 \begin_layout Standard
30623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30633 \begin_inset Note Note
30636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30637 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30645 \begin_layout Left Header
30646 \begin_inset Argument 1
30649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30669 \begin_inset Note Note
30672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30673 defines the header line as described below
30681 \begin_layout Center Header
30682 \begin_inset Argument 1
30685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30694 \begin_layout Right Header
30695 \begin_inset Argument 1
30698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30719 \begin_layout Left Footer
30720 \begin_inset Argument 1
30723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30744 \begin_layout Center Footer
30745 \begin_inset Argument 1
30748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30760 \begin_inset Newline newline
30764 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30770 \begin_layout Right Footer
30771 \begin_inset Argument 1
30774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30796 \begin_layout Section
30797 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30800 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30805 \begin_inset Index idx
30808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30809 Document ! Header/Footer line
30815 \begin_inset Index idx
30818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30827 \begin_layout Standard
30828 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30832 \begin_inset space ~
30843 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30849 \begin_inset space ~
30855 As a second step add in the menu
30857 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30858 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30865 Custom Header/Footerlines
30866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30870 This module offers the following 6
30871 \begin_inset space ~
30877 \begin_layout Description
30879 \begin_inset space ~
30883 \begin_inset space ~
30887 \begin_inset space ~
30891 \begin_inset space ~
30895 \begin_inset space ~
30901 \begin_layout Description
30903 \begin_inset space ~
30907 \begin_inset space ~
30911 \begin_inset space ~
30915 \begin_inset space ~
30919 \begin_inset space ~
30925 \begin_layout Standard
30926 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30929 \begin_layout Standard
30930 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30931 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30933 \begin_inset space ~
30937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30939 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30943 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30946 \begin_layout Standard
30947 \begin_inset Float figure
30953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30956 \begin_inset Tabular
30957 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30958 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30959 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30960 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30961 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30963 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30981 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30992 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31010 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31021 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31025 The normal text on the page goes here.
31026 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31028 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31029 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31034 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31043 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31054 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31072 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31083 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31101 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31119 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31124 name "fig:Page-layout"
31128 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31141 \begin_layout Standard
31142 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31150 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31154 \begin_inset space ~
31159 is set to “Default”.
31160 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31169 \begin_layout Subsection
31173 \begin_layout Standard
31174 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31175 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31176 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31177 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31179 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31180 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31183 \begin_layout Standard
31184 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31185 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31189 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31191 \begin_inset space ~
31199 \begin_layout Description
31202 thepage prints the current page number
31205 \begin_layout Description
31208 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31211 \begin_layout Description
31214 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31217 \begin_layout Description
31220 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31221 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31228 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31231 because it usually goes in a left header.
31234 \begin_layout Description
31237 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31238 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31240 It is normally used in the right header.
31243 \begin_layout Subsection
31244 Default header/footer
31247 \begin_layout Standard
31248 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31249 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31250 footer has the page number.
31251 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31252 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31253 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31256 \begin_inset space ~
31264 \begin_layout Subsection
31268 \begin_layout Standard
31269 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31270 Some pages are different.
31271 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31272 a new part or chapter in your book.
31273 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31274 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31275 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31278 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31279 Header and footer decoration line
31282 \begin_layout Standard
31283 By default, you get a 0.4
31284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31287 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31288 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31300 in the following way:
31303 \begin_layout Standard
31310 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31313 \begin_layout Standard
31314 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31323 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31330 \begin_layout Standard
31331 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31333 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31334 \begin_inset space ~
31338 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31347 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31348 Several header/footer lines
31351 \begin_layout Standard
31352 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31353 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31354 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31356 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31371 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31372 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31374 \begin_inset space ~
31382 \begin_layout Standard
31389 headheight}{height}
31392 \begin_layout Standard
31393 where height is a size in standard units.
31394 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31395 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31396 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31397 logfile with the menu
31399 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31405 \begin_inset space ~
31410 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31415 \begin_inset Index idx
31418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31420 -packages ! fancyhdr
31426 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31427 for your header/footer.
31430 \begin_layout Subsection
31434 \begin_layout Standard
31435 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31436 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31437 This example consists of the following definition:
31440 \begin_layout Description
31442 \begin_inset space ~
31451 , empty optional argument
31454 \begin_layout Description
31456 \begin_inset space ~
31459 Header empty, empty optional argument
31462 \begin_layout Description
31464 \begin_inset space ~
31473 in the optional argument
31476 \begin_layout Description
31478 \begin_inset space ~
31487 in the optional argument
31490 \begin_layout Description
31492 \begin_inset space ~
31505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31509 \begin_inset Newline newline
31513 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31520 in the optional argument
31523 \begin_layout Description
31525 \begin_inset space ~
31534 , empty optional argument
31537 \begin_layout Description
31540 headrulewidth set to 2
31541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31547 \begin_layout Standard
31548 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31549 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31555 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31564 \begin_layout Standard
31565 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31571 \begin_layout Standard
31575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31579 pagestyle{headings}
31585 \begin_inset Note Note
31588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31589 switches back to page style with the default headings
31597 \begin_layout Section
31598 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31601 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31606 \begin_inset Index idx
31609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31616 \begin_inset Index idx
31619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31628 \begin_layout Standard
31630 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31631 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31632 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31635 \begin_layout Subsection
31639 \begin_layout Standard
31640 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31646 \begin_inset Index idx
31649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31651 -packages ! preview-latex
31656 (on some systems named simply
31661 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31663 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31669 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31671 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31679 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31680 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31681 -package are automatically
31682 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31686 \begin_layout Subsection
31690 \begin_layout Standard
31691 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31692 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31694 activate the option
31697 \begin_inset space ~
31704 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31710 \begin_inset space ~
31714 \begin_inset space ~
31717 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31724 \begin_inset space ~
31737 \begin_inset space ~
31742 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31745 \begin_layout Standard
31746 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31751 \begin_inset space ~
31759 \begin_inset space ~
31767 \begin_layout Standard
31768 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31769 and when you finish
31773 \begin_layout Standard
31774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31782 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31783 generated by activating the option
31786 \begin_inset space ~
31792 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31800 \begin_layout Subsection
31801 Selected document parts
31804 \begin_layout Standard
31805 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31806 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31807 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31808 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31810 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31812 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31816 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31817 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31818 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31821 \begin_layout Standard
31822 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31829 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31841 is explained in section
31843 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31848 \begin_inset space ~
31858 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31859 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31860 the final rotated boxes,
31861 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31862 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31864 Here is the result:
31867 \begin_layout Standard
31868 \begin_inset Preview
31870 \begin_layout Standard
31875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31879 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31885 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31895 height_special "totalheight"
31900 backgroundcolor "none"
31903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31928 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31934 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31956 \begin_layout Standard
31957 Previewing works also for colors.
31958 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31977 is explained in section
31984 \begin_inset space ~
31997 \begin_layout Standard
31998 \begin_inset Preview
32000 \begin_layout Standard
32004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32023 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32028 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32047 \begin_layout Standard
32048 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32054 \begin_layout Standard
32055 If \SpecialChar LyX
32056 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32057 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32058 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32059 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32060 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32061 the \SpecialChar TeX
32063 If \SpecialChar LyX
32064 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32065 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32067 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32068 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32069 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32072 \begin_layout Subsection
32077 \begin_layout Standard
32078 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32079 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32082 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32084 \begin_inset space ~
32089 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32091 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32093 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32094 's main window, then only this selection
32095 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32096 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32097 the source view window.
32102 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32103 ; but note that if you have
32104 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32106 not just the one which is open at the time.
32109 \begin_layout Section
32110 Advanced Find and Replace
32111 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32113 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32118 \begin_inset Index idx
32121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32128 \begin_inset Index idx
32131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32140 \begin_layout Subsection
32144 \begin_layout Standard
32145 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32146 allows for searching of complex,
32147 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32149 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32150 The key-features are:
32153 \begin_layout Itemize
32154 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32155 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32156 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32160 \begin_layout Itemize
32161 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32162 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32163 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32164 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32167 \begin_layout Itemize
32168 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32169 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32170 outside of mathematics environments
32173 \begin_layout Itemize
32174 Search may be widened to a specific
32179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32183 \begin_inset space ~
32186 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32187 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32194 \begin_layout Itemize
32195 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32196 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32197 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32201 \begin_inset space ~
32204 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32207 \begin_layout Subsection
32211 \begin_layout Standard
32212 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32214 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32227 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32230 ) or the toolbar button
32233 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32239 Advanced Find and Replace
32244 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32248 \begin_layout Standard
32254 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32258 \begin_inset space ~
32263 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32266 arg "paragraph-break"
32270 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32271 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32275 arg "paragraph-break"
32278 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32282 searches backwards.
32285 \begin_layout Standard
32289 \begin_inset space ~
32294 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32303 \begin_inset space ~
32308 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32311 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32312 Searching for mathematics
32315 \begin_layout Standard
32316 Mathematical formulas, such as
32317 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32320 or something more complex like
32321 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32324 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32329 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32330 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32331 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32332 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32338 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32342 \begin_layout Standard
32343 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32344 This is done by switching to the
32348 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32353 This way, entering in the
32360 \begin_layout Itemize
32361 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32362 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32365 \begin_layout Itemize
32366 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32367 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32370 \begin_layout Itemize
32371 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32372 of it only within section headings.
32373 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32374 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32378 \begin_layout Itemize
32379 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32380 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32383 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32387 \begin_layout Standard
32388 The entries made in the
32392 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32395 \begin_inset space ~
32401 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32405 button or alternatively press
32408 arg "paragraph-break"
32415 while the cursor is in the
32418 \begin_inset space ~
32426 \begin_layout Standard
32427 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32429 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32433 \begin_layout Itemize
32434 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32435 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32443 with its typewriter version
32444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32458 \begin_layout Itemize
32459 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32465 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32477 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32484 (you may want to enable the
32487 \begin_inset space ~
32495 \begin_inset space ~
32500 options and disable the
32508 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32516 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32517 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32521 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32524 , or occurrences of
32525 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32529 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32535 \begin_layout Subsection
32539 \begin_layout Standard
32540 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32545 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32547 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32549 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32558 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32564 This is done with the context menu
32566 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32567 Insert Regular Expression
32569 while the cursor is in the
32574 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32575 expression matching rules
32579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32580 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32583 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32587 \begin_inset space ~
32590 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32591 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32597 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32598 same text in the document.
32599 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32600 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32603 \begin_layout Enumerate
32604 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32609 editor the fraction
32610 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32614 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32617 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32618 fractions with the given denominator.
32621 \begin_layout Enumerate
32622 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32634 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32639 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32640 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32641 Also, by inserting a
32642 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32645 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32646 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32649 \begin_layout Standard
32650 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32651 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32652 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32655 , and referring back to them through
32656 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32660 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32664 For example, try searching with the regexp
32665 \begin_inset Newline newline
32668 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32671 \begin_inset Newline newline
32674 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32677 \begin_layout Standard
32678 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32681 \begin_layout Standard
32682 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32690 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32691 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32692 sub-expressions is absolute.
32694 \begin_inset space ~
32698 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32701 always refers to the first occurrence of
32702 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32705 in all entered regexps.
32713 \begin_layout Section
32715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32717 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32722 \begin_inset Index idx
32725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32734 \begin_layout Standard
32736 has a built-in spell checker.
32739 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32746 key or the toolbar button
32749 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32752 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32753 beginning of the currently selected text.
32754 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32755 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32756 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32757 scrolled so that it is visible.
32758 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32759 n, if any could be found.
32760 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32764 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32765 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32768 \begin_layout Standard
32769 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32772 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32776 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32777 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32779 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32780 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32783 \begin_inset space ~
32791 arg "dialog-show character"
32794 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32796 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32799 \begin_layout Standard
32800 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32801 can be downloaded from here:
32802 \begin_inset Newline newline
32806 \begin_inset Flex URL
32809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32811 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32817 \begin_inset Newline newline
32821 \begin_inset space ~
32824 files for each language.
32825 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32826 \begin_inset space ~
32829 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32830 's installation subfolder
32838 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32840 \begin_inset Newline newline
32843 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32844 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32845 but in most cases these are
32861 is the language code.
32864 \begin_layout Subsection
32868 \begin_layout Standard
32871 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32872 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32874 \begin_inset space ~
32877 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32880 you can set the following things:
32883 \begin_layout Description
32885 \begin_inset space ~
32888 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32889 should use for spell checking.
32890 Depending on your platform,
32904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32905 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32906 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32921 \begin_inset space ~
32924 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32927 \begin_layout Description
32929 \begin_inset space ~
32932 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32933 will always use the given language
32934 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32937 \begin_layout Description
32939 \begin_inset space ~
32942 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32948 \begin_inset space \space{}
32952 This should normally not be needed.
32955 \begin_layout Description
32957 \begin_inset space ~
32961 \begin_inset space ~
32964 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32976 \begin_layout Description
32978 \begin_inset space ~
32981 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32982 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32983 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32984 appear in a context menu.
32985 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32989 \begin_layout Description
32991 \begin_inset space ~
32995 \begin_inset space ~
32999 \begin_inset space ~
33002 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33006 \begin_layout Section
33008 \begin_inset Index idx
33011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33020 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33027 \begin_layout Standard
33029 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33030 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33040 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33042 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33051 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33053 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33054 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33055 which are available for many languages.
33058 \begin_layout Standard
33059 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33060 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33064 \begin_layout Subsection
33065 Setting up the thesaurus
33068 \begin_layout Standard
33077 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33081 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33086 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33092 \begin_inset space ~
33100 For instance, the US English files are named:
33103 \begin_layout Itemize
33107 \begin_layout Itemize
33111 \begin_layout Standard
33120 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33121 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33124 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33125 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33126 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33128 \begin_inset space ~
33133 ) to the path where they are installed.
33137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33138 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33139 ies, typical locations are
33145 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33149 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33153 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33156 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33162 LibreOffice-<Version>
33169 On the Mac, the default location is
33171 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33172 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33173 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33174 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33175 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33176 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33184 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33185 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33186 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33190 \begin_layout Standard
33191 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33192 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33196 \begin_layout Itemize
33197 \begin_inset Flex URL
33200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33202 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33210 \begin_layout Standard
33211 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33212 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33214 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33215 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33216 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33218 \begin_inset space ~
33223 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33225 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33226 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33230 \begin_layout Standard
33231 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33233 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33236 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33242 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33245 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33246 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33254 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33255 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33256 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33258 \begin_inset space ~
33263 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33266 \begin_layout Subsection
33267 Using the thesaurus
33270 \begin_layout Standard
33271 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33273 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33276 or the toolbar button
33279 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33282 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33284 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33286 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33287 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33288 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33297 ), related terms (such as
33300 \begin_inset space ~
33309 ), compounds (such as
33312 \begin_inset space ~
33321 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33330 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33333 \begin_layout Standard
33334 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33335 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33339 \begin_layout Standard
33340 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33341 the dictionary, such as the above
33345 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33350 \begin_inset space \space{}
33353 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33354 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33355 For example, looking up the word form
33359 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33364 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33369 \begin_inset space \space{}
33380 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33381 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33382 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33385 \begin_layout Section
33387 \begin_inset Index idx
33390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33397 \begin_inset Index idx
33400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33401 Document ! Change Tracking
33407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33409 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33416 \begin_layout Standard
33417 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33418 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33419 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33420 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33422 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33424 \begin_inset space ~
33427 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33429 \begin_inset space ~
33437 \begin_layout Standard
33438 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33452 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33453 You can change the color in
33455 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33456 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33458 \begin_inset space ~
33462 \begin_inset space ~
33467 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33473 \begin_inset Index idx
33476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33477 Color ! Change tracking
33482 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33483 's status bar when the
33484 cursor is in changed text.
33485 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33488 arg "changes-merge"
33494 \begin_layout Standard
33495 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33497 \begin_inset Index idx
33500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33509 \begin_layout Standard
33510 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33516 \begin_layout Standard
33517 \begin_inset Graphics
33518 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33526 \begin_layout Standard
33527 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33533 \begin_layout Standard
33534 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33537 \begin_layout Standard
33538 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33544 \begin_layout Standard
33545 \begin_inset Tabular
33546 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33547 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33548 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33549 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33550 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33559 arg "changes-track"
33567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33573 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33575 \begin_inset space ~
33578 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33580 \begin_inset space ~
33589 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33598 arg "changes-output"
33606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33612 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33614 \begin_inset space ~
33617 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33619 \begin_inset space ~
33623 \begin_inset space ~
33627 \begin_inset space ~
33636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33657 Jumps to the next change
33663 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33672 arg "change-accept"
33680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33686 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33688 \begin_inset space ~
33691 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33693 \begin_inset space ~
33702 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33711 arg "change-reject"
33719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33725 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33727 \begin_inset space ~
33730 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33732 \begin_inset space ~
33741 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33750 arg "changes-merge"
33758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33764 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33766 \begin_inset space ~
33769 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33771 \begin_inset space ~
33780 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33789 arg "all-changes-accept"
33797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33803 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33805 \begin_inset space ~
33808 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33810 \begin_inset space ~
33814 \begin_inset space ~
33823 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33832 arg "all-changes-reject"
33840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33846 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33848 \begin_inset space ~
33851 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33853 \begin_inset space ~
33857 \begin_inset space ~
33866 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33889 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33890 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33892 \begin_inset space ~
33901 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33924 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33926 \begin_inset space ~
33942 \begin_layout Standard
33943 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33949 \begin_layout Standard
33950 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33970 \begin_layout Standard
33971 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33972 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33973 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33974 the next change after the current cursor position.
33975 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33976 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33977 step to the next change.
33978 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33981 \begin_layout Standard
33982 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33983 to describe a change.
33986 \begin_layout Standard
33987 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33993 \begin_inset Index idx
33996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33998 -packages ! dvipost
34004 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34006 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34012 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34016 \begin_layout Section
34017 Comparison of Documents
34018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34020 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34025 \begin_inset Index idx
34028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34029 Comparison of documents
34037 \begin_layout Standard
34038 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34041 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34045 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34046 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34048 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34050 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34054 \begin_inset space ~
34058 \begin_inset space ~
34062 \begin_inset space ~
34071 \begin_inset space ~
34075 \begin_inset space ~
34079 \begin_inset space ~
34083 \begin_inset space ~
34087 \begin_inset space ~
34091 \begin_inset space ~
34096 enables the change tracking option
34099 \begin_inset space ~
34103 \begin_inset space ~
34107 \begin_inset space ~
34112 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34115 \begin_layout Section
34116 International Support
34117 \begin_inset Index idx
34120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34121 International support
34129 \begin_layout Standard
34130 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34131 with any language you want.
34132 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34133 up \SpecialChar LyX
34135 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34137 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34144 \begin_layout Standard
34145 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34146 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34147 \begin_inset space ~
34151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34153 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34160 \begin_layout Subsection
34162 \begin_inset Index idx
34165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34172 \begin_inset Index idx
34175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34176 Document ! Settings
34182 \begin_inset Index idx
34185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34186 Document ! Language
34194 \begin_layout Standard
34197 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34198 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34201 dialog lets you set
34203 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34208 \begin_layout Standard
34213 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34218 \begin_inset space ~
34223 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34224 For details about the different encoding options see section
34225 \begin_inset space ~
34229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34231 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34238 \begin_layout Subsection
34239 Keyboard mapping configuration
34240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34242 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34249 \begin_layout Standard
34250 If you have for example a U.
34251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34254 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34255 can use an alternate keymap.
34256 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34261 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34262 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34263 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34266 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34267 \begin_inset space ~
34271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34273 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34278 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34279 which one you want to use.
34282 \begin_layout Standard
34283 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34284 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34285 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34289 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34290 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34291 one to support the characters you want.
34292 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34299 \begin_layout Chapter
34302 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34304 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34311 \begin_layout Standard
34312 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34313 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34314 topic inside the user's guide.
34317 \begin_layout Section
34319 \begin_inset Index idx
34322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34331 \begin_layout Standard
34336 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34339 \begin_layout Subsection
34343 \begin_layout Standard
34344 Creates a new document.
34347 \begin_layout Subsection
34351 \begin_layout Standard
34352 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34353 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34354 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34357 \begin_layout Subsection
34361 \begin_layout Standard
34365 \begin_layout Subsection
34369 \begin_layout Standard
34370 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34371 Click there on a file to open it.
34374 \begin_layout Subsection
34378 \begin_layout Standard
34379 Closes the current document.
34382 \begin_layout Subsection
34386 \begin_layout Standard
34387 Closes all opened documents.
34390 \begin_layout Subsection
34394 \begin_layout Standard
34395 Saves the actual document.
34398 \begin_layout Subsection
34402 \begin_layout Standard
34403 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34406 \begin_layout Subsection
34410 \begin_layout Standard
34411 Saves all opened documents.
34414 \begin_layout Subsection
34418 \begin_layout Standard
34419 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34422 \begin_layout Subsection
34426 \begin_layout Standard
34427 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34428 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34429 It is described in the section
34431 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34436 Additional Features
34441 \begin_layout Subsection
34445 \begin_layout Standard
34446 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34447 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34449 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34450 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34454 \begin_layout Standard
34455 When using the menu entry
34458 \begin_inset space ~
34463 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34467 \begin_inset space ~
34471 \begin_inset space ~
34475 \begin_inset space ~
34480 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34481 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34484 \begin_layout Subsection
34486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34488 name "subsec:Export"
34495 \begin_layout Standard
34496 You can export your document to various file formats.
34497 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34499 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34500 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34501 during its configuration.
34504 \begin_layout Standard
34505 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34507 \begin_inset space ~
34511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34513 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34520 \begin_layout Description
34526 \begin_inset space ~
34529 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34531 \begin_inset space ~
34534 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34535 \begin_inset Newline newline
34538 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34539 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34543 \begin_layout Description
34544 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34550 \begin_layout Description
34552 \begin_inset space ~
34555 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34561 \begin_layout Description
34562 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34563 's native DVI-format.
34564 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34565 files paths or file names in your document.
34567 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34574 \begin_layout Description
34575 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34576 in files paths or file names
34579 \begin_layout Description
34581 \begin_inset space ~
34588 ) DVI-format using the program
34590 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34593 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34597 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34605 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34613 \begin_layout Description
34615 \begin_inset space ~
34618 (cropped) the same as
34622 but with cropped page margins.
34625 \begin_layout Description
34627 \begin_inset space ~
34630 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34634 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34639 \begin_layout Description
34643 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34651 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34659 \begin_layout Description
34661 \begin_inset space ~
34665 \begin_inset space ~
34668 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34672 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34680 \begin_layout Description
34684 \begin_inset space ~
34693 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34694 source that is compilable with the program
34696 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34700 \begin_layout Description
34704 \begin_inset space ~
34709 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34710 source, additionally all images used in the document
34711 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34715 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34718 \begin_layout Description
34722 \begin_inset space ~
34727 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34728 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34729 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34737 \begin_layout Description
34741 \begin_inset space ~
34750 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34751 source that is compilable with the program
34757 \begin_layout Description
34759 \begin_inset space ~
34763 \begin_inset space ~
34770 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34771 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34777 \begin_layout Description
34779 \begin_inset space ~
34782 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34783 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34789 \begin_inset space \space{}
34794 \begin_inset space ~
34798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34813 represent the version number)
34816 \begin_layout Description
34818 \begin_inset space ~
34822 \begin_inset space ~
34825 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34826 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34827 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34831 \begin_layout Description
34832 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34833 's internal XHTML engine
34836 \begin_layout Description
34838 \begin_inset space ~
34842 \begin_inset space ~
34846 \begin_inset space ~
34850 \begin_inset space ~
34853 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
34858 For the conversion the program
34867 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
34870 \begin_layout Description
34871 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34876 \begin_layout Description
34878 \begin_inset space ~
34881 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
34883 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34886 For the conversion the program
34895 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
34898 \begin_layout Description
34900 \begin_inset space ~
34903 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
34904 For the conversion the program
34913 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
34916 \begin_layout Description
34918 \begin_inset space ~
34921 (cropped) the same as
34924 \begin_inset space ~
34929 but with cropped page margins
34932 \begin_layout Description
34936 \begin_inset space ~
34941 PDF-format using the program
34945 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34948 \begin_layout Description
34952 \begin_inset space ~
34956 \begin_inset space ~
34964 \begin_inset space ~
34969 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34974 \begin_inset space \space{}
34977 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34981 \begin_layout Description
34985 \begin_inset space ~
34990 PDF-format using the program
34992 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34995 , produces PDF-files directly
34998 \begin_layout Description
35002 \begin_inset space ~
35007 PDF-format using the program
35011 , produces PDF-files directly
35014 \begin_layout Description
35018 \begin_inset space ~
35023 PDF-format using the program
35027 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35030 \begin_layout Description
35034 \begin_inset space ~
35039 PDF-format using the program
35044 , produces PDF-files directly
35047 \begin_layout Description
35051 \begin_inset space ~
35059 \begin_layout Description
35063 \begin_inset space ~
35067 \begin_inset space ~
35072 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35073 and then exported as text using the program
35078 \begin_layout Description
35083 PostScript format using the program
35088 \begin_layout Description
35089 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35090 source and also code in the statistical programming
35104 it is possible to use
35108 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35112 \begin_layout Standard
35113 If one of the menu entries
35120 \begin_inset space ~
35129 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35131 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35133 \begin_inset space ~
35137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35139 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35144 \begin_inset Index idx
35147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35148 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35157 \begin_layout Subsection
35161 \begin_layout Standard
35162 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35163 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35166 \begin_inset space ~
35170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35172 reference "sec:Paths"
35177 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35186 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35187 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35188 's preferences as described in section
35189 \begin_inset space ~
35193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35195 reference "subsec:Converters"
35202 \begin_layout Subsection
35203 New and Close Window
35206 \begin_layout Standard
35207 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35211 \begin_layout Subsection
35215 \begin_layout Standard
35216 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35219 \begin_layout Section
35221 \begin_inset Index idx
35224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35233 \begin_layout Subsection
35237 \begin_layout Standard
35238 Described in section
35239 \begin_inset space ~
35243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35245 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35252 \begin_layout Subsection
35253 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35256 \begin_layout Standard
35257 Described in section
35258 \begin_inset space ~
35262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35264 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35271 \begin_layout Subsection
35275 \begin_layout Standard
35276 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35277 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35280 \begin_layout Subsection
35284 \begin_layout Standard
35285 Selects the whole document.
35288 \begin_layout Subsection
35289 Find & Replace (Quick)
35292 \begin_layout Standard
35293 Described in section
35294 \begin_inset space ~
35298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35300 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35307 \begin_layout Subsection
35308 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35311 \begin_layout Standard
35312 Described in section
35313 \begin_inset space ~
35317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35319 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35326 \begin_layout Subsection
35327 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35330 \begin_layout Standard
35331 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35335 \begin_layout Subsection
35339 \begin_layout Standard
35340 Described in section
35341 \begin_inset space ~
35345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35347 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35354 \begin_layout Subsection
35356 \begin_inset Index idx
35359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35360 Paragraph ! Settings
35368 \begin_layout Standard
35369 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35370 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35374 \begin_layout Standard
35375 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35376 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35382 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35383 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35385 \begin_inset space ~
35393 \begin_layout Subsection
35397 \begin_layout Standard
35398 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35399 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35400 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35404 \begin_layout Standard
35405 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35407 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35408 The properties of tables are described in section
35409 \begin_inset space ~
35413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35415 reference "sec:Tables"
35419 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35420 \begin_inset space ~
35424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35426 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35433 \begin_layout Subsection
35434 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35437 \begin_layout Standard
35438 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35440 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35441 \begin_inset space ~
35445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35447 reference "sec:Nesting"
35452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35454 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35461 \begin_layout Subsection
35464 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35467 \begin_layout Standard
35468 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35469 nts of the same type.
35471 \begin_inset space ~
35475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35477 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35481 for an explanation.
35484 \begin_layout Section
35486 \begin_inset Index idx
35489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35498 \begin_layout Standard
35499 At the bottom of the
35503 menu the opened documents are listed.
35506 \begin_layout Subsection
35507 Open/Close all Insets
35510 \begin_layout Standard
35511 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35514 \begin_layout Subsection
35515 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35518 \begin_layout Standard
35519 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35522 \begin_layout Standard
35523 Math macros are described in the
35530 \begin_layout Subsection
35534 \begin_layout Standard
35535 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35536 \begin_inset space ~
35540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35542 reference "sec:Navigating"
35547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35549 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35556 \begin_layout Subsection
35560 \begin_layout Standard
35561 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35563 \begin_inset space ~
35567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35569 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35576 \begin_layout Subsection
35580 \begin_layout Standard
35581 Opens a window showing console messages.
35582 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35587 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35588 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35589 is processing the document.
35592 \begin_layout Subsection
35594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35596 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35601 \begin_inset Index idx
35604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35613 \begin_layout Standard
35614 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35615 All toolbars and the
35618 \begin_inset space ~
35623 can be turned on and off.
35628 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35640 \begin_inset space ~
35652 \begin_inset space ~
35657 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35661 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35668 \begin_layout Standard
35673 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35677 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35678 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35679 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35680 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35681 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35684 \begin_layout Standard
35686 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35687 \begin_inset space ~
35691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35693 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35700 \begin_layout Subsection
35704 \begin_layout Standard
35708 \begin_inset space ~
35712 \begin_inset space ~
35716 \begin_inset space ~
35720 \begin_inset space ~
35724 \begin_inset space ~
35728 \begin_inset space ~
35733 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35734 's main window vertically while
35737 \begin_inset space ~
35741 \begin_inset space ~
35745 \begin_inset space ~
35749 \begin_inset space ~
35753 \begin_inset space ~
35757 \begin_inset space ~
35762 will split it horizontally.
35763 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35764 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35765 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35766 three or more documents at the same time.
35767 To close a split view, use the menu
35770 \begin_inset space ~
35774 \begin_inset space ~
35782 \begin_layout Subsection
35786 \begin_layout Standard
35787 Closes a split view.
35790 \begin_layout Subsection
35794 \begin_layout Standard
35795 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35796 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35797 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35798 's main window fullscreen.
35799 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35800 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35803 \begin_layout Section
35805 \begin_inset Index idx
35808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35817 \begin_layout Subsection
35821 \begin_layout Standard
35822 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35823 \begin_inset space ~
35827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35829 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35840 \begin_layout Subsection
35842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35844 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35851 \begin_layout Standard
35852 Here you can insert the following characters:
35855 \begin_layout Description
35860 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35863 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35864 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35865 -packages you have installed.
35866 You can get a complete display by checking
35869 \begin_inset space ~
35875 \begin_inset Newline newline
35879 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35887 Not all characters will be visible in the
35891 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35893 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35899 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
35903 ) can display every character.
35911 \begin_layout Description
35912 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35916 \begin_layout Description
35918 \begin_inset space ~
35922 \begin_inset space ~
35925 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35926 \begin_inset space ~
35930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35932 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35939 \begin_layout Description
35941 \begin_inset space ~
35944 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35947 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35948 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35954 \begin_layout Description
35956 \begin_inset space ~
35959 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35962 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35963 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35969 \begin_layout Description
35971 \begin_inset space ~
35974 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35978 \begin_layout Description
35980 \begin_inset space ~
35983 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35987 \begin_layout Description
35989 \begin_inset space ~
35992 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35998 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36004 \begin_layout Description
36006 \begin_inset space ~
36009 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36013 \begin_layout Description
36015 \begin_inset space ~
36019 \begin_inset Index idx
36022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36029 \begin_inset Index idx
36032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36033 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36038 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36039 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36041 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36047 \begin_inset Index idx
36050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36058 \begin_inset Newline newline
36061 More information about this feature can be found in the
36067 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36073 \begin_layout Description
36074 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36076 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36077 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36081 \begin_layout Subsection
36085 \begin_layout Standard
36086 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36089 \begin_layout Description
36090 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36091 \begin_inset script superscript
36093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36102 \begin_layout Description
36103 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36104 \begin_inset script subscript
36106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36115 \begin_layout Description
36117 \begin_inset space ~
36120 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36121 \begin_inset space ~
36125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36127 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36134 \begin_layout Description
36136 \begin_inset space ~
36139 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36140 \begin_inset space ~
36144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36146 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36153 \begin_layout Description
36155 \begin_inset space ~
36158 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36159 \begin_inset space ~
36163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36165 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36172 \begin_layout Description
36174 \begin_inset space ~
36177 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36183 \begin_inset space \space{}
36186 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36187 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36196 To insert a fraction use the command
36201 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36205 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36214 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36221 \begin_layout Description
36223 \begin_inset space ~
36226 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36227 \begin_inset space ~
36231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36233 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36240 \begin_layout Description
36242 \begin_inset space ~
36245 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36246 \begin_inset space ~
36250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36252 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36259 \begin_layout Description
36261 \begin_inset space ~
36264 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36265 \begin_inset space ~
36269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36271 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36278 \begin_layout Description
36279 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36280 \begin_inset space ~
36284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36286 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36293 \begin_layout Description
36295 \begin_inset space ~
36298 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36299 \begin_inset space ~
36303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36305 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36312 \begin_layout Description
36314 \begin_inset space ~
36317 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36318 \begin_inset space ~
36322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36324 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36331 \begin_layout Description
36333 \begin_inset space ~
36337 \begin_inset space ~
36340 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36341 \begin_inset space ~
36345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36347 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36354 \begin_layout Description
36356 \begin_inset space ~
36359 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36360 as described in section
36361 \begin_inset space ~
36365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36367 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36374 \begin_layout Description
36376 \begin_inset space ~
36379 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36380 \begin_inset space ~
36384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36386 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36393 \begin_layout Description
36395 \begin_inset space ~
36398 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36399 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36401 \begin_inset space ~
36405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36407 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36414 \begin_layout Description
36416 \begin_inset space ~
36419 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36420 \begin_inset space ~
36424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36426 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36433 \begin_layout Description
36435 \begin_inset space ~
36439 \begin_inset space ~
36442 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36443 \begin_inset space ~
36447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36449 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36456 \begin_layout Subsection
36460 \begin_layout Standard
36461 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36465 \begin_inset space ~
36486 are described in section
36487 \begin_inset space ~
36491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36493 reference "sec:toc"
36502 is described in section
36503 \begin_inset space ~
36507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36509 reference "sec:Index"
36517 is described in section
36518 \begin_inset space ~
36522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36524 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36530 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36533 is described in section
36534 \begin_inset space ~
36538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36540 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36547 \begin_layout Subsection
36551 \begin_layout Standard
36552 To insert floats, as described in section
36553 \begin_inset space ~
36557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36559 reference "sec:Floats"
36563 and in detail the chapter
36570 \begin_inset space ~
36578 \begin_layout Subsection
36582 \begin_layout Standard
36583 To insert notes, described in section
36584 \begin_inset space ~
36588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36590 reference "sec:Notes"
36597 \begin_layout Subsection
36601 \begin_layout Standard
36602 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36604 Branches are described in section
36605 \begin_inset space ~
36609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36611 reference "sec:Branches"
36618 \begin_layout Subsection
36622 \begin_layout Standard
36623 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36624 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36626 An example is the document class
36627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36634 with three custom insets.
36637 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36641 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36647 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36650 \begin_layout Subsection
36652 \begin_inset Index idx
36655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36664 \begin_layout Standard
36665 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36667 For more information see chapter
36669 External Document Parts
36672 \begin_inset space ~
36678 \begin_layout Subsection
36680 \begin_inset Index idx
36683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36692 \begin_layout Standard
36693 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36694 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36701 \begin_inset space ~
36709 \begin_layout Subsection
36713 \begin_layout Standard
36718 dialog as described in section
36719 \begin_inset space ~
36723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36725 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36732 \begin_layout Subsection
36736 \begin_layout Standard
36741 as described in section
36742 \begin_inset space ~
36746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36748 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36755 \begin_layout Subsection
36759 \begin_layout Standard
36764 as described in section
36765 \begin_inset space ~
36769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36771 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36778 \begin_layout Subsection
36780 \begin_inset Index idx
36783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36790 \begin_inset Index idx
36793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36794 Longtables ! Caption
36802 \begin_layout Standard
36803 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36804 Floats are described in section
36805 \begin_inset space ~
36809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36811 reference "sec:Floats"
36815 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36822 \begin_inset space ~
36830 \begin_layout Subsection
36834 \begin_layout Standard
36835 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36836 \begin_inset space ~
36840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36842 reference "sec:Index"
36849 \begin_layout Subsection
36853 \begin_layout Standard
36854 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36855 \begin_inset space ~
36859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36861 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36868 \begin_layout Subsection
36872 \begin_layout Standard
36873 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36874 Tables are described in section
36875 \begin_inset space ~
36879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36881 reference "sec:Tables"
36885 and in detail in the chapter
36892 \begin_inset space ~
36900 \begin_layout Subsection
36904 \begin_layout Standard
36910 Graphics are described in section
36911 \begin_inset space ~
36915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36917 reference "sec:Graphics"
36924 \begin_layout Subsection
36928 \begin_layout Standard
36929 Inserts a URL as described in section
36930 \begin_inset space ~
36934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36936 reference "subsec:URLs"
36943 \begin_layout Subsection
36947 \begin_layout Standard
36948 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36949 \begin_inset space ~
36953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36955 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36962 \begin_layout Subsection
36966 \begin_layout Standard
36967 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36968 \begin_inset space ~
36972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36974 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36981 \begin_layout Subsection
36985 \begin_layout Standard
36986 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36987 \begin_inset space ~
36991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36993 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37000 \begin_layout Subsection
37004 \begin_layout Standard
37005 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37006 title or caption of a float.
37007 Inserts a short title as described in section
37008 \begin_inset space ~
37012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37014 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37021 \begin_layout Subsection
37026 \begin_layout Standard
37027 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37028 Code box as described in section
37029 \begin_inset space ~
37033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37035 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37042 \begin_layout Subsection
37044 \begin_inset Index idx
37047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37056 \begin_layout Standard
37057 Inserts a program listings box.
37058 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37060 Program Code Listings
37065 \begin_inset space ~
37073 \begin_layout Subsection
37077 \begin_layout Standard
37078 Inserts the actual date.
37079 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37083 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37091 \begin_inset space ~
37099 \begin_layout Subsection
37103 \begin_layout Standard
37104 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37105 \begin_inset space ~
37109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37111 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37118 \begin_layout Section
37120 \begin_inset Index idx
37123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37132 \begin_layout Standard
37133 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37134 \begin_inset space ~
37137 of the current document.
37138 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37141 \begin_layout Subsection
37145 \begin_layout Standard
37146 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37147 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37148 to jump, for example, between section
37149 \begin_inset space ~
37153 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37154 \begin_inset space ~
37157 2.5 and use the submenu
37160 \begin_inset space ~
37164 \begin_inset space ~
37171 \begin_inset space ~
37177 \begin_inset space ~
37181 \begin_inset space ~
37187 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37191 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37197 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37200 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37203 \begin_layout Standard
37204 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37208 \begin_inset space ~
37213 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37216 \begin_inset space ~
37221 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37224 \begin_layout Subsection
37225 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37228 \begin_layout Standard
37229 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37233 \begin_layout Subsection
37237 \begin_layout Standard
37238 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37239 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37240 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37244 \begin_inset space ~
37248 \begin_inset space ~
37256 \begin_layout Subsection
37260 \begin_layout Standard
37261 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37264 The \SpecialChar LyX
37265 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37267 \begin_inset space ~
37275 \begin_inset space ~
37280 manual for a detailed description.
37283 \begin_layout Section
37285 \begin_inset Index idx
37288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37297 \begin_layout Subsection
37301 \begin_layout Standard
37302 Change Tracking is described in section
37303 \begin_inset space ~
37307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37309 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37316 \begin_layout Subsection
37324 \begin_layout Standard
37325 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37326 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37327 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37329 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37330 to the clipboard or update the view.
37331 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37335 \begin_layout Subsection
37336 Start Appendix Here
37339 \begin_layout Standard
37340 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37341 as described in section
37342 \begin_inset space ~
37346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37348 reference "sec:Appendices"
37355 \begin_layout Subsection
37357 \begin_inset space ~
37363 \begin_layout Standard
37364 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37365 default output format for the document (menu
37367 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37368 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37369 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37371 \begin_inset space ~
37375 \begin_inset space ~
37381 \begin_inset space ~
37385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37387 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37391 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37394 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37395 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37397 \begin_inset space ~
37400 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37402 \begin_inset space ~
37405 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37407 \begin_inset space ~
37411 \begin_inset space ~
37417 \begin_inset space ~
37421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37423 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37427 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37428 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37430 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37431 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37433 \begin_inset space ~
37436 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37438 \begin_inset space ~
37441 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37445 \begin_inset space ~
37449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37451 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37456 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37457 when it is first configured.
37458 The default output format is
37461 \begin_inset space ~
37469 \begin_layout Subsection
37470 View (Other Formats)
37473 \begin_layout Standard
37474 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37475 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37476 actual document with an external program.
37477 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37478 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37479 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37481 All possible formats are listed in section
37482 \begin_inset space ~
37486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37488 reference "subsec:Export"
37493 You should at least see the menu entry
37498 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37500 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37502 \begin_inset space ~
37506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37508 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37513 \begin_inset Index idx
37516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37517 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37526 \begin_layout Standard
37527 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37528 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37530 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37531 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37533 \begin_inset space ~
37536 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37538 \begin_inset space ~
37541 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37545 \begin_inset space ~
37549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37551 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37556 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37557 when it is first configured.
37560 \begin_layout Subsection
37562 \begin_inset space ~
37568 \begin_layout Standard
37569 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37570 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37573 \begin_layout Subsection
37574 Update (Other Formats)
37577 \begin_layout Standard
37578 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37579 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37582 \begin_layout Subsection
37583 View Master Document
37586 \begin_layout Standard
37587 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37603 \begin_inset space ~
37608 manual for more information on this topic).
37609 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37610 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37614 \begin_inset space ~
37618 \begin_inset space ~
37623 generates the output of the whole book, while
37627 will just output the chapter alone.
37630 \begin_layout Standard
37631 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37632 in the document settings (menu
37634 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37635 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37636 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37638 \begin_inset space ~
37642 \begin_inset space ~
37648 \begin_inset space ~
37652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37654 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37658 ) or in the preferences (menu
37660 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37661 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37663 \begin_inset space ~
37666 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37668 \begin_inset space ~
37671 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37673 \begin_inset space ~
37677 \begin_inset space ~
37683 \begin_inset space ~
37687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37689 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37696 \begin_layout Subsection
37697 Update Master Document
37700 \begin_layout Standard
37701 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37717 \begin_inset space ~
37722 manual for more information on this topic).
37723 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37724 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37727 \begin_layout Standard
37728 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37729 in the document settings (menu
37731 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37732 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37733 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37735 \begin_inset space ~
37739 \begin_inset space ~
37745 \begin_inset space ~
37749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37751 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37755 ) or in the preferences (menu
37757 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37758 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37760 \begin_inset space ~
37763 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37765 \begin_inset space ~
37768 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37770 \begin_inset space ~
37774 \begin_inset space ~
37780 \begin_inset space ~
37784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37786 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37793 \begin_layout Subsection
37795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37797 name "subsec:Compressed"
37804 \begin_layout Standard
37805 Un/compresses the current document.
37806 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37807 compression (see the
37809 Additional Features
37811 manual for details).
37814 \begin_layout Subsection
37818 \begin_layout Standard
37819 The document settings are described in appendix
37820 \begin_inset space ~
37824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37826 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37833 \begin_layout Section
37835 \begin_inset Index idx
37838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37847 \begin_layout Subsection
37851 \begin_layout Standard
37852 Spell checking is explained in section
37853 \begin_inset space ~
37857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37859 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37866 \begin_layout Subsection
37870 \begin_layout Standard
37871 The thesaurus is described in section
37872 \begin_inset space ~
37876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37878 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37885 \begin_layout Subsection
37887 \begin_inset Index idx
37890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37897 \begin_inset Index idx
37900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37909 \begin_layout Standard
37910 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37911 the highlighted document part.
37914 \begin_layout Subsection
37920 \begin_inset Index idx
37923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37924 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37933 \begin_layout Standard
37934 Generates with the help of the program
37936 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37939 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37940 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37941 This feature is not available on Windows.
37944 \begin_layout Subsection
37950 \begin_inset Index idx
37953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37963 \begin_layout Standard
37964 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37969 \begin_inset space ~
37974 to see the full filename paths.
37977 \begin_layout Subsection
37979 \begin_inset Index idx
37982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37991 \begin_layout Standard
37992 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37993 files as described in section
37994 \begin_inset space ~
37998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38000 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38007 \begin_layout Subsection
38009 \begin_inset Index idx
38012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38025 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38043 \begin_inset Index idx
38046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38047 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38056 \begin_layout Standard
38057 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38058 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38059 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38060 -packages and programs it needs; see
38062 \begin_inset space ~
38066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38068 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38075 \begin_layout Subsection
38079 \begin_layout Standard
38084 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38085 \begin_inset space ~
38089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38091 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38098 \begin_layout Section
38100 \begin_inset Index idx
38103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38112 \begin_layout Standard
38113 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38114 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38116 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38120 \begin_layout Standard
38124 \begin_inset space ~
38129 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38130 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38131 packages and classes found
38132 by \SpecialChar LyX
38134 \begin_inset space ~
38138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38140 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38147 \begin_layout Standard
38151 \begin_inset space ~
38156 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38161 \begin_layout Section
38163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38165 name "sec:Toolbars"
38172 \begin_layout Standard
38173 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38174 \begin_inset space ~
38178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38180 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38187 \begin_layout Standard
38188 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38189 This is described in the
38191 Additional Features
38196 \begin_layout Subsection
38198 \begin_inset Index idx
38201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38210 \begin_layout Standard
38211 \begin_inset Graphics
38212 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38220 \begin_layout Standard
38221 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38227 \begin_layout Standard
38228 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38245 \begin_inset Note Note
38248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38249 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38254 manual for more information.
38262 \begin_layout Standard
38263 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38269 \begin_layout Standard
38270 \begin_inset Tabular
38271 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38272 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38273 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38274 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38280 \begin_inset Graphics
38281 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38295 pull-down box for the environments
38308 \begin_layout Standard
38309 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38315 \begin_layout Standard
38317 \begin_inset Tabular
38318 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38319 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38320 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38321 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38322 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38345 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38375 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38382 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38405 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38412 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38421 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38435 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38442 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38451 arg "spelling-continuously"
38459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38463 Spellcheck continuously
38469 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38499 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38522 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38529 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38552 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38559 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38582 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38589 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38612 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38619 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38628 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38642 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38644 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38661 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38668 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38682 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38701 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38710 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38724 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38725 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38732 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38753 Emphasize text, function of the
38755 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38757 \begin_inset space ~
38760 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38769 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38790 Set text to noun style, function of the
38792 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38794 \begin_inset space ~
38797 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38806 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38815 arg "textstyle-apply"
38823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38827 Format text using the current settings in the
38829 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38831 \begin_inset space ~
38834 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38843 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38866 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38867 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38869 \begin_inset space ~
38878 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38887 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38901 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38908 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38915 arg "tabular-insert"
38923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38936 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38945 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38957 Toggle outline window on/off,
38959 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38966 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38975 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38987 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38993 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39002 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39014 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39027 \begin_layout Subsection
39029 \begin_inset Index idx
39032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39041 \begin_layout Standard
39042 \begin_inset Graphics
39043 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39051 \begin_layout Standard
39052 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39058 \begin_layout Standard
39059 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39063 \begin_layout Standard
39064 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39070 \begin_layout Standard
39071 \begin_inset Tabular
39072 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39073 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39074 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39075 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39076 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39103 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39112 arg "layout Enumerate"
39120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39130 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39139 arg "layout Itemize"
39147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39184 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39193 arg "layout Description"
39201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39211 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39220 arg "depth-increment"
39228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39234 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39236 \begin_inset space ~
39240 \begin_inset space ~
39249 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39258 arg "depth-decrement"
39266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39272 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39274 \begin_inset space ~
39278 \begin_inset space ~
39287 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39296 arg "float-insert figure"
39304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39310 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39311 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39318 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39327 arg "float-insert table"
39335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39341 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39342 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39349 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39372 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39379 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39388 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39402 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39409 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39418 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39432 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39439 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39462 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39464 \begin_inset space ~
39473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39482 arg "nomencl-insert"
39490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39496 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39498 \begin_inset space ~
39507 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39516 arg "footnote-insert"
39524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39537 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39546 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39560 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39562 \begin_inset space ~
39571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39594 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39595 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39597 \begin_inset space ~
39606 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39615 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39629 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39636 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39659 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39666 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39689 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39691 \begin_inset space ~
39700 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39709 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39723 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39724 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39731 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39740 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39755 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39757 \begin_inset space ~
39766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39775 arg "dialog-show character"
39783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39789 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39791 \begin_inset space ~
39794 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39801 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39810 arg "layout-paragraph"
39818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39824 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39826 \begin_inset space ~
39835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39844 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39858 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39872 \begin_layout Subsection
39873 View/Update Toolbar
39874 \begin_inset Index idx
39877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39878 Toolbar ! View / Update
39886 \begin_layout Standard
39887 \begin_inset Graphics
39888 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39895 \begin_layout Standard
39896 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39902 \begin_layout Standard
39903 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39907 \begin_layout Standard
39908 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39914 \begin_layout Standard
39915 \begin_inset Tabular
39916 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39917 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39918 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39919 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39920 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39943 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39950 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39959 arg "buffer-update"
39967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39973 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39980 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39989 arg "master-buffer-view"
39997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40003 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40005 \begin_inset space ~
40014 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40023 arg "master-buffer-update"
40031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40037 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40039 \begin_inset space ~
40043 \begin_inset space ~
40052 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40061 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40075 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40076 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40077 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40078 Synchronize with Output
40084 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40108 View (Other Formats)
40114 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40121 arg "update-others"
40129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40135 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40136 Update (Other Formats)
40149 \begin_layout Standard
40150 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40154 \begin_layout Subsection
40158 \begin_layout Standard
40159 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40160 \begin_inset space ~
40164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40166 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40170 , the table toolbar
40171 \begin_inset Index idx
40174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40183 \begin_inset space ~
40188 manual and the math macro toolbar
40189 \begin_inset Index idx
40192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40205 \begin_layout Chapter
40206 The Document Settings
40207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40209 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40214 \begin_inset Index idx
40217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40218 Document ! Settings
40226 \begin_layout Standard
40230 \begin_inset space ~
40235 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40236 is called with the menu
40238 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40242 You can save your document settings as default with the
40244 Save as Document Defaults
40246 button in any dialog.
40247 This will create a template named
40251 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40252 when you create a new document without
40256 \begin_layout Standard
40261 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40262 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40265 \begin_layout Standard
40266 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40267 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40268 to find the one you are looking for.
40269 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40270 the submenus of the dialog.
40272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40276 \begin_inset space \space{}
40280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40287 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40288 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40289 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40292 \begin_layout Section
40296 \begin_layout Standard
40297 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40299 Document classes are described in section
40300 \begin_inset space ~
40304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40306 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40314 \begin_layout Standard
40318 \begin_inset space ~
40323 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40328 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40329 as a layout for a document class.
40330 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40332 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40341 \begin_layout Standard
40342 Some classes use special class options by default.
40343 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40347 and you can decide to use them or not.
40348 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40349 recommended you leave them untouched.
40354 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40355 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40360 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40362 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40368 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40369 \begin_inset Newline newline
40374 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40377 \begin_inset Newline newline
40380 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40381 distribution, see section
40386 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40388 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40400 \begin_layout Standard
40405 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40406 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40407 in the background if the child document
40408 is opened without its master.
40409 This way child documents are always compilable.
40410 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40417 \begin_inset space ~
40425 \begin_layout Standard
40426 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40437 \begin_inset Index idx
40440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40442 -packages ! prettyref
40448 \begin_inset Index idx
40451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40453 -packages ! refstyle
40458 for cross-references, see section
40459 \begin_inset space ~
40463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40465 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40472 \begin_layout Section
40476 \begin_layout Standard
40477 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40478 Please refer to the section
40481 \begin_inset space ~
40489 \begin_inset space ~
40494 manual for details.
40497 \begin_layout Section
40501 \begin_layout Standard
40502 Modules are explained in section
40503 \begin_inset space ~
40507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40509 reference "subsec:Modules"
40516 \begin_layout Section
40520 \begin_layout Standard
40522 \begin_inset space ~
40526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40528 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40535 \begin_layout Section
40539 \begin_layout Standard
40540 The document font settings are described in section
40541 \begin_inset space ~
40545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40547 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40554 \begin_layout Section
40558 \begin_layout Standard
40559 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40571 \begin_inset space ~
40576 and whether it should be a
40579 \begin_inset space ~
40584 can also be specified here.
40587 \begin_layout Standard
40588 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40589 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40590 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40592 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40595 \begin_layout Standard
40598 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40601 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40602 justifies the text on screen.
40603 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40607 \begin_layout Section
40611 \begin_layout Standard
40612 This dialog is described in sections
40613 \begin_inset space ~
40617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40619 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40626 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40633 \begin_layout Section
40637 \begin_layout Standard
40638 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40639 \begin_inset space ~
40643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40645 reference "subsec:Margins"
40652 \begin_layout Section
40654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40656 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40661 \begin_inset Index idx
40664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40665 Language ! Encoding
40673 \begin_layout Standard
40674 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40675 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40676 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40678 is always encoded in utf8).
40679 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40680 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40681 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40682 -command is not known for
40683 a particular character).
40686 \begin_layout Standard
40687 If you use the option
40692 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40693 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40694 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40696 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40697 exactly one encoding.
40698 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40701 \begin_layout Standard
40703 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40704 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40705 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40706 installation supports Unicode), choose
40707 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40708 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40709 is quite incomplete, so
40710 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40715 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40716 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40717 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40718 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40719 -commands is not used, because all
40720 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40721 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40722 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40723 , two new alternative engines
40724 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40726 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40728 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40731 \begin_inset space ~
40739 \begin_inset space ~
40747 \begin_inset space ~
40753 \begin_inset space ~
40757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40759 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40764 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40768 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40771 \begin_layout Standard
40775 \begin_inset space ~
40780 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40781 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40791 The possible settings are:
40794 \begin_layout Description
40795 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40797 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40798 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40802 \begin_inset space ~
40806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40808 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40815 \begin_layout Description
40816 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40817 format you will use.
40818 In many cases this will be
40823 \begin_inset Index idx
40826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40834 If the newer package
40839 \begin_inset Index idx
40842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40844 -packages ! polyglossia
40849 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40850 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40851 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40853 this package will be used instead of
40860 \begin_layout Description
40862 \begin_inset space ~
40873 would be more appropriate.
40876 \begin_layout Description
40877 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40878 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40882 (for German texts), type in
40885 \begin_inset Newline newline
40890 usepackage{ngerman}
40893 \begin_layout Description
40894 None will not use a language package.
40895 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40898 \begin_layout Standard
40899 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40902 \begin_layout Description
40904 \begin_inset space ~
40908 \begin_inset space ~
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40919 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40925 \begin_inset Index idx
40928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40930 -packages ! inputenc
40936 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40937 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40938 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40942 \begin_layout Description
40943 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40945 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40946 commands, which may result in a big
40947 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40948 -commands are needed.
40951 \begin_layout Description
40953 \begin_inset space ~
40957 \begin_inset space ~
40960 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40963 \begin_layout Description
40965 \begin_inset space ~
40969 \begin_inset space ~
40972 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40975 \begin_layout Description
40977 \begin_inset space ~
40980 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40983 \begin_layout Description
40985 \begin_inset space ~
40989 \begin_inset space ~
40992 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40993 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40996 \begin_layout Description
40998 \begin_inset space ~
41002 \begin_inset space ~
41005 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41009 \begin_layout Description
41011 \begin_inset space ~
41015 \begin_inset space ~
41018 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41019 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41022 \begin_layout Description
41024 \begin_inset space ~
41028 \begin_inset space ~
41032 \begin_inset space ~
41035 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41036 \begin_inset space ~
41042 \begin_layout Description
41044 \begin_inset space ~
41048 \begin_inset space ~
41052 \begin_inset space ~
41055 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41056 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41059 \begin_layout Description
41061 \begin_inset space ~
41065 \begin_inset space ~
41068 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41069 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41070 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41071 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41072 \begin_inset space ~
41076 \begin_inset space ~
41082 \begin_layout Description
41084 \begin_inset space ~
41088 \begin_inset space ~
41091 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41092 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41093 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41095 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41096 \begin_inset space ~
41100 \begin_inset space ~
41106 \begin_layout Description
41108 \begin_inset space ~
41112 \begin_inset space ~
41115 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41118 \begin_layout Description
41120 \begin_inset space ~
41124 \begin_inset space ~
41127 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41130 \begin_layout Description
41132 \begin_inset space ~
41136 \begin_inset space ~
41139 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41142 \begin_layout Description
41144 \begin_inset space ~
41147 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41150 \begin_layout Description
41152 \begin_inset space ~
41155 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41158 \begin_layout Description
41160 \begin_inset space ~
41164 \begin_inset space ~
41167 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41170 \begin_layout Description
41172 \begin_inset space ~
41176 \begin_inset space ~
41182 \begin_layout Description
41184 \begin_inset space ~
41188 \begin_inset space ~
41191 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41194 \begin_layout Description
41196 \begin_inset space ~
41200 \begin_inset space ~
41206 \begin_layout Description
41208 \begin_inset space ~
41212 \begin_inset space ~
41215 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41221 \begin_inset Index idx
41224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41231 , when using this, set the document language to
41236 \begin_layout Description
41238 \begin_inset space ~
41242 \begin_inset space ~
41245 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41250 , when using this, set the document language to
41253 \begin_inset space ~
41259 \begin_layout Description
41261 \begin_inset space ~
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41268 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41274 \begin_inset Index idx
41277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41279 -packages ! japanese
41284 , when using this, set the document language to
41289 \begin_layout Description
41291 \begin_inset space ~
41295 \begin_inset space ~
41298 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41303 , when using this, set the document language to
41308 \begin_layout Description
41310 \begin_inset space ~
41314 \begin_inset space ~
41317 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41322 , when using this, set the document language to
41327 \begin_layout Description
41329 \begin_inset space ~
41332 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41335 \begin_layout Description
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41341 \begin_inset space ~
41345 \begin_inset space ~
41348 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41351 \begin_layout Description
41353 \begin_inset space ~
41357 \begin_inset space ~
41361 \begin_inset space ~
41364 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41365 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41366 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41369 \begin_layout Description
41371 \begin_inset space ~
41375 \begin_inset space ~
41381 \begin_layout Description
41383 \begin_inset space ~
41387 \begin_inset space ~
41390 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41391 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41394 \begin_layout Description
41396 \begin_inset space ~
41400 \begin_inset space ~
41403 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41409 \begin_inset Index idx
41412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41419 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41422 \begin_layout Description
41424 \begin_inset space ~
41432 \begin_inset space ~
41435 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41442 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41445 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41452 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41453 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41455 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41458 \begin_layout Description
41460 \begin_inset space ~
41464 \begin_inset space ~
41467 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41473 \begin_inset Index idx
41476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41483 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41486 \begin_layout Description
41488 \begin_inset space ~
41491 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41497 \begin_inset Index idx
41500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41502 -packages ! inputenc
41508 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41512 \begin_layout Description
41514 \begin_inset space ~
41518 \begin_inset space ~
41522 \begin_inset space ~
41525 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41526 \begin_inset space ~
41532 \begin_layout Description
41534 \begin_inset space ~
41538 \begin_inset space ~
41542 \begin_inset space ~
41545 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41546 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41547 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41551 \begin_layout Description
41553 \begin_inset space ~
41557 \begin_inset space ~
41561 \begin_inset space ~
41564 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41565 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41568 \begin_layout Section
41570 \begin_inset Index idx
41573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41580 \begin_inset Index idx
41583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41590 \begin_inset Index idx
41593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41594 Color ! Shaded boxes
41600 \begin_inset Index idx
41603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41604 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41612 \begin_layout Standard
41613 Here you can alter the font color for the
41617 (default: black), for
41620 \begin_inset space ~
41625 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41629 (default: white) and for
41632 \begin_inset space ~
41642 sets the color back to the default.
41645 \begin_layout Standard
41646 Clicking any button showing
41654 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41655 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41656 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41657 later more quickly.
41660 \begin_layout Standard
41661 Note, if you change the
41664 \begin_inset space ~
41669 font color and use the option
41672 \begin_inset space ~
41677 in the document settings under
41680 \begin_inset space ~
41685 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41686 \begin_inset space ~
41690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41692 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41699 \begin_layout Standard
41700 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41706 \begin_layout Standard
41710 \begin_inset space ~
41719 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41722 \begin_inset space ~
41725 Code after a forced page break:
41728 \begin_layout Itemize
41729 For the page color:
41730 \begin_inset Newline newline
41737 pagecolor{color name}
41740 \begin_layout Itemize
41741 For the text color:
41742 \begin_inset Newline newline
41752 \begin_layout Standard
41753 You are restricted to one of
41789 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41796 \begin_inset space ~
41802 \begin_inset Newline newline
41805 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41806 names to refer to them:
41809 \begin_layout Itemize
41815 \begin_inset Newline newline
41820 page_backgroundcolor
41823 \begin_layout Itemize
41827 \begin_inset space ~
41833 \begin_inset Newline newline
41841 \begin_layout Itemize
41845 \begin_inset space ~
41851 \begin_inset Newline newline
41859 \begin_layout Itemize
41863 \begin_inset space ~
41869 \begin_inset Newline newline
41877 \begin_layout Standard
41878 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41881 \begin_inset space ~
41889 \begin_inset space ~
41897 \begin_layout Section
41901 \begin_layout Standard
41902 Here you can adjust the
41906 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41910 as described in section
41911 \begin_inset space ~
41915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41917 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41924 \begin_layout Section
41928 \begin_layout Standard
41929 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41935 \begin_inset Index idx
41938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41950 \begin_inset Index idx
41953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41955 -packages ! jurabib
41963 Sectioned bibliography
41965 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41971 \begin_inset Index idx
41974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41976 -packages ! bibtopic
41981 and you can select a
41985 for the generation of the bibliography.
41986 For a further description see section
41987 \begin_inset space ~
41991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41993 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42000 \begin_layout Section
42004 \begin_layout Standard
42005 Here you can define the
42009 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42011 \begin_inset space ~
42015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42017 reference "sec:Index"
42024 \begin_layout Section
42028 \begin_layout Standard
42029 The PDF properties are explained in section
42030 \begin_inset space ~
42034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42036 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42043 \begin_layout Section
42047 \begin_layout Standard
42048 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42049 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42055 \begin_inset Index idx
42058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42060 -packages ! amsmath
42070 \begin_inset Index idx
42073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42075 -packages ! amssymb
42085 \begin_inset Index idx
42088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42100 \begin_inset Index idx
42103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42115 \begin_inset Index idx
42118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42120 -packages ! mathdots
42130 \begin_inset Index idx
42133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42135 -packages ! mathtools
42145 \begin_inset Index idx
42148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42160 \begin_inset Index idx
42163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42165 -packages ! stackrel
42175 \begin_inset Index idx
42178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42180 -packages ! stmaryrd
42190 \begin_inset Index idx
42193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42195 -packages ! undertilde
42200 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42203 \begin_layout Description
42204 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42205 -errors in formulas,
42206 ensure that you have this enabled.
42209 \begin_layout Description
42210 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42211 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42212 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42216 \begin_layout Description
42217 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42220 \begin_inset space ~
42232 \begin_layout Description
42233 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42236 \begin_inset space ~
42248 \begin_layout Description
42249 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42260 \begin_layout Description
42261 mathtools is used for the math commands
42297 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42304 \begin_layout Description
42305 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42307 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42316 \begin_layout Description
42317 stackrel is used for the math command
42334 \begin_layout Description
42335 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42338 \begin_layout Description
42339 undertilde is used for the math command
42347 Accents for one Character
42356 \begin_layout Section
42360 \begin_layout Standard
42361 The float placement options are described in the section
42364 \begin_inset space ~
42372 \begin_inset space ~
42380 \begin_layout Section
42384 \begin_layout Standard
42385 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42387 Program Code Listings
42392 \begin_inset space ~
42400 \begin_layout Section
42404 \begin_layout Standard
42405 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42413 set to be used and set the
42418 The itemize environment is described in section
42419 \begin_inset space ~
42423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42425 reference "sec:Itemize"
42432 \begin_layout Standard
42433 You can furthermore specify a
42436 \begin_inset space ~
42441 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42442 command of the desired character.
42443 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42450 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42456 \begin_inset space \space{}
42460 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42470 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42471 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42474 \begin_layout Standard
42475 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42483 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42484 -packages in the preamble (menu
42487 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42488 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42491 \begin_inset space ~
42497 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42501 usepackage{textcomp}
42504 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42508 usepackage{amssymb}
42518 \begin_layout Section
42522 \begin_layout Standard
42523 Branches are described in section
42524 \begin_inset space ~
42528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42530 reference "sec:Branches"
42537 \begin_layout Section
42539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42541 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42548 \begin_layout Standard
42549 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42552 \begin_layout Description
42554 \begin_inset space ~
42558 \begin_inset space ~
42561 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42581 View Master Document
42582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42589 Update Master Document
42590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42597 menu or the toolbar.
42598 The default is set in
42600 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42601 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42603 \begin_inset space ~
42606 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42610 \begin_inset space ~
42614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42616 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42623 \begin_layout Description
42625 \begin_inset space ~
42629 \begin_inset space ~
42632 Output settings for the menu
42634 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42636 \begin_inset space ~
42642 For a detailed description see section
42644 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42649 \begin_inset space ~
42657 \begin_layout Description
42659 \begin_inset space ~
42663 \begin_inset space ~
42666 Options offers settings for the export format
42674 \begin_inset space ~
42679 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42680 \begin_inset space ~
42683 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42687 \begin_inset space ~
42692 settings are described in detail in section
42694 Math Output in XHTML
42699 \begin_inset space ~
42708 \begin_inset space ~
42712 \begin_inset space ~
42717 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42720 \begin_layout Section
42728 \begin_layout Standard
42729 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42731 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42733 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42735 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42739 \begin_layout Standard
42740 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42741 -syntax is given in section
42742 \begin_inset space ~
42746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42748 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42755 \begin_layout Chapter
42761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42763 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42768 \begin_inset Index idx
42771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42780 \begin_layout Standard
42781 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42783 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42787 It has the following submenus.
42790 \begin_layout Section
42794 \begin_layout Subsection
42798 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42799 User Interface File
42800 \begin_inset Index idx
42803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42804 Customization ! of toolbars
42810 \begin_inset Index idx
42813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42814 Customization ! of menus
42822 \begin_layout Standard
42823 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42824 interface (ui) file.
42825 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42833 \begin_layout Description
42838 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42841 \begin_layout Description
42848 the menu entries in popup context menus
42851 \begin_layout Description
42856 specifies the toolbar buttons
42859 \begin_layout Standard
42860 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42861 and edit the entries.
42864 \begin_layout Standard
42865 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42877 entries must be finished with an explicit
42902 and in the case of the
42903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42915 The syntax for the entries is:
42918 \begin_layout Standard
42919 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42948 \begin_layout Standard
42950 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42953 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42954 -functions are listed in the menu
42956 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42958 \begin_inset space ~
42966 \begin_layout Standard
42967 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42973 \begin_layout Standard
42974 For example, assuming you use the menu
42976 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42979 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42983 \begin_layout Standard
42984 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43008 \begin_layout Standard
43010 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43025 to have the sixth bookmark.
43028 \begin_layout Standard
43032 \begin_inset space ~
43037 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43038 's toolbar buttons.
43039 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43040 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43043 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43054 \begin_layout Standard
43057 Enable tool tips in main work area
43059 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43063 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43067 \begin_layout Standard
43072 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43073 should display in the menu
43075 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43077 \begin_inset space ~
43085 \begin_layout Subsection
43089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43093 \begin_layout Standard
43096 Restore window layouts and geometries
43099 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43100 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43104 \begin_layout Standard
43107 Restore cursor positions
43109 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43113 \begin_layout Standard
43116 Load opened files from last session
43118 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43122 \begin_layout Standard
43125 Clear all session information
43127 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43128 sessions (cursor positions, names
43129 of last opened documents, etc.).
43132 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43136 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43141 \begin_inset Index idx
43144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43153 \begin_layout Standard
43156 Backup original documents when saving
43158 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43159 it was saved the last time.
43160 It is stored in the
43163 \begin_inset space ~
43169 \begin_inset space ~
43173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43175 reference "sec:Paths"
43179 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43182 \begin_inset space ~
43188 The backup file has the file extension
43189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43203 \begin_layout Standard
43206 Backup documents, every
43208 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43211 \begin_layout Standard
43214 Save documents compressed by default
43216 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43217 \begin_inset space ~
43221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43223 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43228 This applies to newly created documents only.
43229 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43232 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43233 Windows & work area
43236 \begin_layout Standard
43239 Open documents in tabs
43241 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43245 \begin_layout Standard
43250 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43263 reference "sec:Paths"
43267 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43274 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43275 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43276 of \SpecialChar LyX
43278 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43279 instance is created for each file.
43282 \begin_layout Standard
43285 Single close-tab button
43287 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43297 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43298 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43301 \begin_layout Standard
43302 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43310 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43311 before the change takes effect.
43319 \begin_layout Standard
43324 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43326 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43328 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43332 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43333 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43334 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43337 \begin_layout Subsection
43339 \begin_inset Index idx
43342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43351 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43358 \begin_layout Standard
43359 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43363 \begin_layout Standard
43364 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43372 This section only deals with the fonts
43376 the \SpecialChar LyX
43378 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43381 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43382 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43393 \begin_layout Standard
43394 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43411 (depends on the system) as its
43414 \begin_inset space ~
43430 \begin_layout Standard
43431 You can change the font size with the
43438 \begin_layout Standard
43443 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43448 points have the size of 1
43449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43453 \begin_inset space ~
43457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43459 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43464 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43469 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43470 \begin_inset space ~
43474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43476 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43483 \begin_layout Standard
43486 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43488 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43489 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43490 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43491 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43492 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43494 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43495 \begin_inset space ~
43501 \begin_layout Subsection
43503 \begin_inset Index idx
43506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43507 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43514 \begin_inset Index idx
43517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43526 \begin_layout Standard
43527 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43528 by choosing an item in the
43529 list and selecting the
43536 \begin_layout Standard
43537 By checking the option
43541 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43544 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43545 \begin_inset space ~
43549 \begin_inset space ~
43554 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43557 \begin_layout Subsection
43559 \begin_inset Index idx
43562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43571 \begin_layout Standard
43572 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43576 \begin_layout Standard
43581 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43582 This feature is described in section
43583 \begin_inset space ~
43587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43589 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43596 \begin_layout Standard
43597 Checking the option
43600 \begin_inset space ~
43604 \begin_inset space ~
43608 \begin_inset space ~
43613 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43616 \begin_layout Section
43618 \begin_inset Index idx
43621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43630 \begin_layout Subsection
43634 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43638 \begin_layout Standard
43641 Cursor follows scrollbar
43643 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43647 \begin_layout Standard
43648 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43649 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43650 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43653 \begin_layout Standard
43656 Scroll below end of document
43658 is self-explanatory.
43661 \begin_layout Standard
43662 In \SpecialChar LyX
43663 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43670 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43672 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43673 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43676 \begin_layout Standard
43679 Sort environments alphabetically
43681 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43684 \begin_layout Standard
43687 Group environments by their category
43689 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43692 \begin_layout Standard
43697 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43708 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43712 \begin_layout Standard
43713 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43718 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43719 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43723 \begin_layout Subsection
43725 \begin_inset Index idx
43728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43735 \begin_inset Index idx
43738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43739 Settings ! Shortcuts
43747 \begin_layout Standard
43752 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43754 Several binding files are available, among them:
43757 \begin_layout Description
43758 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43761 \begin_layout Description
43762 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43774 \begin_layout Description
43775 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43786 \begin_layout Standard
43787 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43792 , and binding files for special languages.
43793 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43798 \begin_inset space \space{}
43802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43810 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43811 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43812 will try to use the appropriate binding
43816 \begin_layout Standard
43817 Some binding files, like
43821 , only have a limited scope.
43822 When looking at the end of the file
43826 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43829 \begin_layout Standard
43833 \begin_inset space ~
43837 \begin_inset space ~
43842 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43843 in the selected key binding file.
43846 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43850 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43855 \begin_inset Index idx
43858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43859 Key Bindings ! Editing
43867 \begin_layout Standard
43868 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43869 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43870 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43871 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43874 Show key-bindings containing
43877 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43878 Insert there for example as keyword
43879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43886 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43887 functions that contain
43888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43896 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43897 All \SpecialChar LyX
43898 functions are also listed in the file
43903 that you will find in the
43910 \begin_layout Standard
43911 For example, to add the shortcut
43919 , select the function and press the
43924 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43925 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43928 \begin_layout Standard
43929 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43930 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43932 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43933 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43935 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43940 \begin_layout Standard
43941 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43944 \begin_layout Standard
43945 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43947 The syntax of the entries is:
43950 \begin_layout Standard
43956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43975 \begin_layout Subsection
43977 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43979 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43984 \begin_inset Index idx
43987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43994 \begin_inset Index idx
43997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43998 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44006 \begin_layout Standard
44007 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44008 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44009 provides keyboard maps.
44010 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44011 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44014 \begin_inset space ~
44018 \begin_inset space ~
44023 and select the keyboard map file named
44030 \begin_layout Standard
44039 keyboard map and, if you use the
44043 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44046 arg "keymap-primary"
44052 arg "keymap-secondary"
44055 respectively or toggle between them with
44058 arg "keymap-toggle"
44064 \begin_layout Standard
44065 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44073 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44082 \begin_layout Standard
44083 You can also specify the mouse
44085 Wheel scrolling speed
44088 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44092 \begin_layout Standard
44100 \begin_inset space ~
44104 \begin_inset space ~
44109 you can select a key for zooming.
44110 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44113 \begin_layout Subsection
44117 \begin_layout Standard
44118 Input completion is described in section
44119 \begin_inset space ~
44123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44125 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44132 \begin_layout Section
44134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44141 \begin_inset Index idx
44144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44151 \begin_inset Index idx
44154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44163 \begin_layout Standard
44164 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44165 are normally determined during
44167 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44170 \begin_layout Description
44172 \begin_inset space ~
44175 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44176 's working directory.
44177 It is the default when you
44188 \begin_inset space ~
44196 \begin_layout Description
44198 \begin_inset space ~
44201 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44203 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44205 \begin_inset space ~
44209 \begin_inset space ~
44217 \begin_layout Description
44219 \begin_inset space ~
44222 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44228 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44232 \begin_inset Newline newline
44236 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44248 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44249 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44257 \begin_layout Description
44259 \begin_inset space ~
44263 \begin_inset Index idx
44266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44272 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44273 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44274 \begin_inset space ~
44278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44280 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44288 will be used to save the backups.
44289 \begin_inset Newline newline
44292 Backup files have the ending
44293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44303 \begin_layout Description
44305 \begin_inset space ~
44308 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44309 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44311 \begin_inset Newline newline
44318 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44324 You can edit this file with the program
44333 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44334 in its preferences under
44337 \begin_inset space ~
44343 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44348 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44350 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44351 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44357 and \SpecialChar LyX
44358 need to be running the same time.
44359 \begin_inset Newline newline
44362 The pipe is also used for the
44367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44373 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44378 \begin_inset Newline newline
44381 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44382 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44383 \begin_inset Newline newline
44399 \begin_layout Description
44401 \begin_inset space ~
44404 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44407 \begin_layout Description
44409 \begin_inset space ~
44412 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44413 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44414 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44417 \begin_layout Description
44419 \begin_inset space ~
44422 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44428 You only need to specify it if you are using
44432 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44434 For \SpecialChar LyX
44439 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44443 \begin_layout Description
44445 \begin_inset space ~
44448 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44449 When \SpecialChar LyX
44450 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44451 to find it on the system.
44452 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44454 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44460 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44463 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44464 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44467 \begin_layout Description
44469 \begin_inset space ~
44472 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44473 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44474 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44475 code or in the document
44477 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44479 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44480 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44481 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44482 scanned for the input files.
44483 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44484 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44486 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44487 compilation may fail for some documents.
44490 \begin_layout Section
44494 \begin_layout Standard
44495 Here you can insert your
44504 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44506 \begin_inset space ~
44510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44512 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44516 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44519 \begin_layout Section
44521 \begin_inset Index idx
44524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44525 Language ! Settings
44531 \begin_inset Index idx
44534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44535 Settings ! Language
44543 \begin_layout Subsection
44545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44547 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44554 \begin_layout Description
44556 \begin_inset space ~
44560 \begin_inset space ~
44563 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44565 You can find its actual translation status here:
44566 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44568 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44575 \begin_layout Description
44577 \begin_inset space ~
44580 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44581 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44582 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44583 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44600 The most widespread language package is
44605 \begin_inset Index idx
44608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44615 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44617 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44618 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44619 come with the alternative
44625 \begin_inset Index idx
44628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44630 -packages ! polyglossia
44635 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44636 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44642 The available selections are described in section
44643 \begin_inset space ~
44647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44649 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44656 \begin_layout Description
44658 \begin_inset space ~
44661 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44662 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44663 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44664 An example is the start command
44670 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44672 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44676 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44691 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44696 \begin_layout Description
44698 \begin_inset space ~
44706 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44707 command toggles the package on and off.
44710 \begin_layout Description
44712 \begin_inset space ~
44716 \begin_inset space ~
44719 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44723 \begin_layout Description
44725 \begin_inset space ~
44729 \begin_inset space ~
44732 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44736 \begin_layout Description
44738 \begin_inset space ~
44742 \begin_inset space ~
44745 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44746 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44747 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44749 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44756 \begin_layout Description
44758 \begin_inset space ~
44761 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44763 When this option is not set, the
44766 \begin_inset space ~
44771 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44773 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44776 \begin_inset space ~
44784 \begin_layout Description
44786 \begin_inset space ~
44792 \begin_inset space ~
44798 When it is not set, the
44801 \begin_inset space ~
44806 is set to the end of the document.
44809 \begin_layout Description
44811 \begin_inset space ~
44815 \begin_inset space ~
44818 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44819 language will be underlined in blue.
44822 \begin_layout Description
44824 \begin_inset space ~
44828 \begin_inset space ~
44831 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44832 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44835 \begin_layout Description
44837 \begin_inset space ~
44840 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44841 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44842 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44843 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44846 \begin_layout Subsection
44850 \begin_layout Standard
44851 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44852 \begin_inset space ~
44856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44858 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44865 \begin_layout Section
44869 \begin_layout Subsection
44873 \begin_layout Description
44875 \begin_inset space ~
44879 \begin_inset space ~
44882 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44885 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44886 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44888 \begin_inset space ~
44894 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44897 \begin_layout Description
44899 \begin_inset space ~
44903 \begin_inset Index idx
44906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44913 \begin_inset Index idx
44916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44917 Settings ! Date format
44922 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44923 \begin_inset Newline newline
44927 \begin_inset Flex URL
44930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44932 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
44938 \begin_inset Newline newline
44941 For example the format
44942 \begin_inset Newline newline
44946 \begin_inset Newline newline
44949 prints the date as day/month/year.
44952 \begin_layout Description
44954 \begin_inset space ~
44958 \begin_inset space ~
44961 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44962 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44965 \begin_layout Description
44967 \begin_inset space ~
44970 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44972 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44974 \begin_inset space ~
44980 For a detailed description see section
44982 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44987 \begin_inset space ~
44995 \begin_layout Subsection
45001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45003 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45008 \begin_inset Index idx
45011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45012 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45021 \begin_layout Description
45023 \begin_inset space ~
45031 \begin_inset space ~
45035 \begin_inset space ~
45038 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45043 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45064 are used for Cyrillic.
45065 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45078 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45080 sets up in the background.
45081 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45084 \begin_layout Description
45086 \begin_inset space ~
45090 \begin_inset space ~
45093 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45098 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45102 \begin_layout Description
45104 \begin_inset space ~
45108 \begin_inset space ~
45112 \begin_inset space ~
45116 \begin_inset space ~
45119 options They only have an effect when the program
45123 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45126 \begin_layout Standard
45127 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45128 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45129 manuals of the applications.
45132 \begin_layout Description
45134 \begin_inset space ~
45137 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45138 \begin_inset space ~
45142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45144 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45151 \begin_layout Description
45153 \begin_inset space ~
45156 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45157 \begin_inset space ~
45161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45163 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45170 \begin_layout Description
45172 \begin_inset space ~
45175 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45176 \begin_inset space ~
45180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45182 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45189 \begin_layout Description
45195 \begin_inset space ~
45198 command Command for the program
45200 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45203 that is described in the section
45205 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45210 Additional Features
45215 \begin_layout Standard
45216 There are additionally the following options:
45219 \begin_layout Description
45221 \begin_inset space ~
45225 \begin_inset space ~
45229 \begin_inset space ~
45233 \begin_inset space ~
45238 \begin_inset space ~
45241 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45259 to separate folders.
45260 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45262 \begin_inset Index idx
45265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45272 \begin_inset Index idx
45275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45284 \begin_layout Description
45286 \begin_inset space ~
45290 \begin_inset space ~
45294 \begin_inset space ~
45298 \begin_inset space ~
45302 \begin_inset space ~
45306 \begin_inset space ~
45309 changes Removes all manually set
45315 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45316 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45318 \begin_inset space ~
45323 dialog when changing the document class.
45326 \begin_layout Section
45328 \begin_inset space ~
45332 \begin_inset Index idx
45335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45344 \begin_layout Subsection
45346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45348 name "subsec:Converters"
45353 \begin_inset Index idx
45356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45365 \begin_layout Standard
45366 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45367 from one format to another.
45368 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45369 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45376 \begin_inset space ~
45381 field and press the
45386 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45390 \begin_inset space ~
45395 drop-down list, modify the
45399 field and press the
45406 \begin_layout Standard
45409 Converter File Cache
45415 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45417 Maximum Age (in days
45420 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45421 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45424 \begin_layout Standard
45425 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45426 definition, is described in the section
45437 \begin_layout Subsection
45439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45441 name "sec:File-Formats"
45446 \begin_inset Index idx
45449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45456 \begin_inset Index idx
45459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45468 \begin_layout Standard
45469 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45479 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45482 \begin_layout Standard
45483 You can also define the
45485 Default output format
45487 that is used when you use
45489 View, Update, View Master Document
45493 Update Master Document
45499 menu or the toolbar.
45502 \begin_layout Standard
45503 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45514 \begin_layout Standard
45515 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45517 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45518 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45519 This is done by specifying a
45524 More about this is described in the section
45535 \begin_layout Chapter
45536 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45538 \begin_inset Index idx
45541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45550 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45557 \begin_layout Standard
45559 \begin_inset space ~
45563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45565 reference "tab:Units"
45569 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45570 and used in this documentation.
45573 \begin_layout Standard
45574 \begin_inset Float table
45580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45581 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45584 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45599 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45607 \begin_inset Tabular
45608 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45609 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45610 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45611 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45612 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45818 scaled point (65536
45819 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45860 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45893 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45897 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45901 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45970 % of original image width
45975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46286 \begin_layout Chapter
46288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46290 name "chap:Credits"
46297 \begin_layout Standard
46298 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46299 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46302 \begin_layout Itemize
46305 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46308 \begin_layout Itemize
46314 \begin_layout Itemize
46320 \begin_layout Itemize
46326 \begin_layout Itemize
46332 \begin_layout Itemize
46338 \begin_layout Itemize
46344 \begin_layout Itemize
46350 \begin_layout Itemize
46353 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46356 \begin_layout Itemize
46362 \begin_layout Itemize
46368 \begin_layout Itemize
46374 \begin_layout Itemize
46380 \begin_layout Itemize
46386 \begin_layout Itemize
46392 \begin_layout Itemize
46398 \begin_layout Itemize
46404 \begin_layout Itemize
46405 The \SpecialChar LyX
46407 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46416 \begin_layout Standard
46417 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46420 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46427 \begin_layout Bibliography
46428 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46429 LatexCommand bibitem
46435 The \SpecialChar LyX
46437 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46440 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46445 \begin_inset Newline newline
46449 \begin_inset Flex URL
46452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46454 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46462 \begin_layout Bibliography
46463 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46464 LatexCommand bibitem
46465 key "latexcompanion"
46469 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46471 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46472 Companion Second Edition.
46475 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46478 \begin_layout Bibliography
46479 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46480 LatexCommand bibitem
46485 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46488 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46492 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46495 \begin_layout Bibliography
46496 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46497 LatexCommand bibitem
46505 : A Document Preparation System.
46508 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46511 \begin_layout Bibliography
46512 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46513 LatexCommand bibitem
46522 The \SpecialChar TeX
46526 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46529 \begin_layout Bibliography
46530 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46531 LatexCommand bibitem
46536 The \SpecialChar TeX
46538 \begin_inset Newline newline
46542 \begin_inset Flex URL
46545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46547 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46555 \begin_layout Bibliography
46556 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46557 LatexCommand bibitem
46562 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46564 \begin_inset Newline newline
46568 \begin_inset Flex URL
46571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46573 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46581 \begin_layout Bibliography
46582 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46583 LatexCommand bibitem
46589 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46591 name "Documentation"
46592 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46598 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46602 \begin_inset Newline newline
46606 \begin_inset Flex URL
46609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46611 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46619 \begin_layout Bibliography
46620 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46621 LatexCommand bibitem
46627 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46629 name "Documentation"
46630 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46634 how to use the program
46636 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46640 \begin_inset Newline newline
46644 \begin_inset Flex URL
46647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46649 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46657 \begin_layout Bibliography
46658 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46659 LatexCommand bibitem
46665 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46667 name "Documentation"
46668 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46677 \begin_inset Newline newline
46681 \begin_inset Flex URL
46684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46686 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46694 \begin_layout Bibliography
46695 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46696 LatexCommand bibitem
46697 key "makeindex-man"
46702 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46705 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46714 \begin_inset Newline newline
46718 \begin_inset Flex URL
46721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46723 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
46731 \begin_layout Bibliography
46732 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46733 LatexCommand bibitem
46739 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46741 name "Documentation"
46742 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46751 \begin_inset Newline newline
46755 \begin_inset Flex URL
46758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46760 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46768 \begin_layout Bibliography
46769 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46770 LatexCommand bibitem
46776 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46778 name "Documentation"
46779 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46783 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46785 \begin_inset Newline newline
46789 \begin_inset Flex URL
46792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46794 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46802 \begin_layout Bibliography
46803 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46804 LatexCommand bibitem
46810 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46812 name "Documentation"
46813 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46817 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46823 \begin_inset Index idx
46826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46828 -packages ! caption
46834 \begin_inset Newline newline
46838 \begin_inset Flex URL
46841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46843 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46851 \begin_layout Bibliography
46852 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46853 LatexCommand bibitem
46859 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46861 name "Documentation"
46862 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46866 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46872 \begin_inset Index idx
46875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46877 -packages ! enumitem
46883 \begin_inset Newline newline
46887 \begin_inset Flex URL
46890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46892 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46900 \begin_layout Bibliography
46901 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46902 LatexCommand bibitem
46908 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46910 name "Documentation"
46911 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46915 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46921 \begin_inset Index idx
46924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46926 -packages ! fancyhdr
46932 \begin_inset Newline newline
46936 \begin_inset Flex URL
46939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46941 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46949 \begin_layout Bibliography
46950 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46951 LatexCommand bibitem
46957 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46959 name "Documentation"
46960 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46964 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46970 \begin_inset Index idx
46973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46975 -packages ! hyperref
46981 \begin_inset Newline newline
46985 \begin_inset Flex URL
46988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46990 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46998 \begin_layout Bibliography
46999 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47000 LatexCommand bibitem
47006 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47008 name "Documentation"
47009 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47013 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47019 \begin_inset Index idx
47022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47024 -packages ! nomencl
47030 \begin_inset Newline newline
47034 \begin_inset Flex URL
47037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47039 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47047 \begin_layout Bibliography
47048 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47049 LatexCommand bibitem
47055 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47057 name "Documentation"
47058 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47062 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47068 \begin_inset Index idx
47071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47073 -packages ! prettyref
47079 \begin_inset Newline newline
47083 \begin_inset Flex URL
47086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47088 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47096 \begin_layout Bibliography
47097 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47098 LatexCommand bibitem
47104 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47106 name "Documentation"
47107 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47111 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47117 \begin_inset Index idx
47120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47122 -packages ! refstyle
47128 \begin_inset Newline newline
47132 \begin_inset Flex URL
47135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47137 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47145 \begin_layout Bibliography
47146 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47147 LatexCommand bibitem
47153 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47156 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47160 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47162 \begin_inset Newline newline
47166 \begin_inset Flex URL
47169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47171 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47179 \begin_layout Bibliography
47180 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47181 LatexCommand bibitem
47187 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47190 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47194 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47196 \begin_inset Newline newline
47200 \begin_inset Flex URL
47203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47205 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47213 \begin_layout Bibliography
47214 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47215 LatexCommand bibitem
47221 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47224 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47228 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47229 for Cyrillic languages:
47230 \begin_inset Newline newline
47234 \begin_inset Flex URL
47237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47239 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47247 \begin_layout Bibliography
47248 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47249 LatexCommand bibitem
47255 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47258 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47262 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47264 \begin_inset Newline newline
47268 \begin_inset Flex URL
47271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47273 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47281 \begin_layout Bibliography
47282 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47283 LatexCommand bibitem
47289 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47292 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47296 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47298 \begin_inset Newline newline
47302 \begin_inset Flex URL
47305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47307 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47315 \begin_layout Bibliography
47316 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47317 LatexCommand bibitem
47323 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47326 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47330 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47332 \begin_inset Newline newline
47336 \begin_inset Flex URL
47339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47341 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47349 \begin_layout Bibliography
47350 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47351 LatexCommand bibitem
47357 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47360 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47364 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47366 \begin_inset Newline newline
47370 \begin_inset Flex URL
47373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47375 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47383 \begin_layout Bibliography
47384 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47385 LatexCommand bibitem
47391 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47394 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47398 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47400 \begin_inset Newline newline
47404 \begin_inset Flex URL
47407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47409 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47417 \begin_layout Bibliography
47418 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47419 LatexCommand bibitem
47425 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47428 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47432 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47434 \begin_inset Newline newline
47438 \begin_inset Flex URL
47441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47443 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47451 \begin_layout Bibliography
47452 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47453 LatexCommand bibitem
47459 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47462 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47466 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47468 \begin_inset Newline newline
47472 \begin_inset Flex URL
47475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47477 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47485 \begin_layout Bibliography
47486 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47487 LatexCommand bibitem
47493 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47496 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47500 about new features in
47506 \begin_inset Newline newline
47510 \begin_inset Flex URL
47513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47515 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47523 \begin_layout Standard
47524 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47558 \begin_inset Note Note
47561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47568 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47569 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47570 bibliography is the second one:
47578 \begin_layout Standard
47579 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47580 LatexCommand bibtex
47581 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47582 options "biblio/alphadin"
47589 \begin_layout Standard
47590 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47594 \begin_layout Standard
47595 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47596 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47602 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47603 LatexCommand printindex